Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
ERGA04DAV3(A)
ERGA06DAV3(A)
ERGA08DAV3(A)
EHVH04S18DA6V(G)
EHVH04S23DA6V(G)
EHVH08S18DA6V(G)
EHVH08S23DA6V(G)
EHVH08S18DA9W(G)
EHVH08S23DA9W(G)
EHVX04S18DA3V(G)
EHVX04S18DA6V(G)
EHVX04S23DA3V(G)
EHVX04S23DA6V(G)
EHVX08S18DA6V(G)
EHVX08S23DA6V(G)
EHVX08S18DA9W(G)
EHVX08S23DA9W(G)
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
Final English - Tanslations in progress
English
Table of contents
6.2.2
Table of contents
6.3
1 General safety precautions
1.1
1.2
About the documentation ..........................................................
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
For the installer..........................................................................
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
2 About the documentation
2.1
2.2
About this document..................................................................
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
3 About the box
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.3
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
3.2.2
To handle the outdoor unit ..........................................
3.2.3
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
Indoor unit .................................................................................
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit ...........................................
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the indoor unit.........
3.3.3
To handle the indoor unit ............................................
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
Setting up the space heating/cooling system ............................
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank........................
5.4.2
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply ............................
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation ........................................
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................
5.6.3
Power limitation process .............................................
Setting up an external temperature sensor ...............................
6 Preparation
6.1
6.2
2
6.5
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
7 Installation
7.1
7.2
7.3
9
7.4
7.5
10
10
10
11
12
14
15
16
16
7.6
16
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
Overview: Preparation............................................................... 21
Preparing the installation site .................................................... 21
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit ........ 21
Installer reference guide
6.4
6
Overview: About the units and options......................................
9
Identification ..............................................................................
9
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit ................................. 9
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit .................................... 9
Combining units and options .....................................................
9
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit........................... 9
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit............................. 9
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor
unit .............................................................................. 10
5 Application guidelines
5.1
5.2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
4 About the units and options
4.1
4.2
3
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates ........................................
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the indoor unit ...........
Preparing refrigerant piping........................................................
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements...................................
6.3.2
Refrigerant piping insulation ........................................
Preparing water piping ...............................................................
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements ...........................................
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel prepressure .......................................................................
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate ....................
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel....
6.4.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................
Preparing electrical wiring ..........................................................
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring..................................
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply ...................
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ......................................................................
6.5.4
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators .........................................................
7.7
7.8
22
22
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
Overview: Installation .................................................................
Opening the units .......................................................................
7.2.1
About opening the units ...............................................
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit..............................................
7.2.3
To open the indoor unit ................................................
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit ..........
7.2.5
To lower the switch box on the indoor unit...................
Mounting the outdoor unit...........................................................
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit..................................
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...............
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure .............................
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit.............................................
7.3.5
To provide drainage .....................................................
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ...............
Mounting the indoor unit.............................................................
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit ....................................
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor unit.................
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit...............................................
Connecting the refrigerant piping ...............................................
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping .......................
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the refrigerant piping ....
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the refrigerant piping ......
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines...............................................
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end ....................................................
7.5.6
To braze the pipe end ..................................................
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port ..........................
7.5.8
To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit ...
7.5.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit .....
Checking the refrigerant piping ..................................................
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping ..........................
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the refrigerant piping .......
7.6.3
To check for leaks........................................................
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying ...........................................
Charging refrigerant ...................................................................
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant ...........................................
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant ........................
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant amount ...........
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge amount ..............
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant ...................................
7.7.6
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases label .............
Connecting the water piping.......................................................
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping...............................
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............
7.8.3
To connect the water piping.........................................
7.8.4
To connect the recirculation piping ..............................
7.8.5
To connect the drain hose to the drain ........................
7.8.6
To fill the water circuit ..................................................
7.8.7
To fill the domestic hot water tank ...............................
Final English - Tanslations in progress
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
1 General safety precautions
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.8.8
To insulate the water piping ........................................
Connecting the electrical wiring.................................................
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring.........................
7.9.2
About electrical compliance ........................................
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring .....
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring .......
7.9.5
Specifications of standard wiring components............
7.9.6
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
7.9.7
To connect the electrical wiring on the indoor unit......
7.9.8
To connect the main power supply .............................
7.9.9
To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
7.9.10 To connect the shut-off valve......................................
7.9.11 To connect the electrical meters .................................
7.9.12 To connect the domestic hot water pump ...................
7.9.13 To connect the alarm output .......................................
7.9.14 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF
output ..........................................................................
7.9.15 To connect the changeover to external heat source...
7.9.16 To connect the power consumption digital inputs .......
7.9.17 To connect the safety thermostat (normal closed
contact) .......................................................................
Finishing the outdoor unit installation ........................................
7.10.1 To finish the outdoor unit installation ..........................
Finishing the indoor unit installation ..........................................
7.11.1 To close the indoor unit...............................................
8 Configuration
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
12.1
12.2
12.3
46
47
47
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
52
52
52
53
58
59
63
66
67
68
74
75
76
77
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
Checklist before commissioning................................................
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
9.4.3
To perform an operation test run ................................
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
78
79
80
11 Maintenance and service
80
Overview: Maintenance and service .........................................
Maintenance safety precautions................................................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit ................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit...................
80
80
80
81
11.4.1 To drain the domestic hot water tank...........................
About cleaning the water filter in case of trouble........................
11.5.1 To remove the water filter ............................................
11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble ...................
11.5.3 To install the water filter ...............................................
12 Troubleshooting
45
46
46
10 Hand-over to the user
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
12.4
47
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
8.1.1
To access the most used commands .........................
Configuration wizard..................................................................
Possible screens .......................................................................
8.3.1
Possible screens: Overview........................................
8.3.2
Home screen...............................................................
8.3.3
Main menu screen ......................................................
8.3.4
Menu screen ...............................................................
8.3.5
Setpoint screen ...........................................................
8.3.6
Detailed screen with values ........................................
8.3.7
Detailed screen with weather-dependent curve..........
8.3.8
Schedule screen: Example .........................................
Settings menu ...........................................................................
8.4.1
Malfunction..................................................................
8.4.2
Room ..........................................................................
8.4.3
Main zone ...................................................................
8.4.4
Additional zone ...........................................................
8.4.5
Space heating/cooling.................................................
8.4.6
Tank ............................................................................
8.4.7
User settings ...............................................................
8.4.8
Information ..................................................................
8.4.9
Installer settings ..........................................................
8.4.10 Operation ....................................................................
Menu structure: Overview user settings ....................................
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
9 Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
41
42
43
44
45
45
45
45
14.6
14.7
14.8
84
84
84
84
85
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
87
14 Technical data
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
83
83
84
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 87
To pump down............................................................................ 87
To start and stop forced cooling ................................................. 88
89
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit......................................................
Piping diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit .....................................................
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant charge allowed in a room:
indoor unit...................................................................................
Table 2 – Minimum floor area: indoor unit..................................
Table 3 – Minimum venting opening area for natural
ventilation: indoor unit ................................................................
ESP curve: Indoor unit ...............................................................
89
90
91
92
95
95
95
96
15 Glossary
96
16 Field settings table
97
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide MUST be
performed by an authorised installer.
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols
DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
83
Overview: Troubleshooting.........................................................
Precautions when troubleshooting .............................................
Solving problems based on symptoms.......................................
12.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as
expected ......................................................................
12.3.2 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating)..............................
12.3.3 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) .......
12.3.4 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens..................
12.3.5 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks .........
12.3.6 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................
12.3.7 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusually high ...........................................
12.3.8 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank ..........................................................
12.3.9 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error).....................................
Solving problems based on error codes.....................................
12.4.1 To display the help text in case of a malfunction .........
12.4.2 Error codes: Overview .................................................
13 Disposal
13.1
13.2
13.3
82
82
82
82
83
Installer reference guide
3
1 General safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
WARNING
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
CAUTION
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.
NOTICE
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
Symbol
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and
operation manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks,
read the service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user
reference guide.
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information MUST be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
1.2
For the installer
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
1.2.1
General
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
If you are NOT sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
1.2.2
Installation site
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
NOTICE
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by Daikin.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any
ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the Daikin documentation).
CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
WARNING
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
Installer reference guide
4
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
1 General safety precautions
NOTICE
If
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
A siphon tube is present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are NOT
subjected to stress.
A siphon tube is NOT present
WARNING
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
immediately. If the valve is NOT closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
WARNING
ALWAYS recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
WARNING
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
NOTICE
WARNING
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant MUST be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
1.2.5
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
5
2 About the documentation
1.2.6
Electrical
NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure above.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
WARNING
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
▪ All field wiring MUST be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
NOTICE
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do NOT come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
2
About the documentation
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
2.1
About this document
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Indoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/supportand-manuals/product-information/
Installer reference guide
6
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
3 About the box
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit) + Digital files on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/productinformation/
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit MUST be checked for damage. Any damage
MUST be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional Daikin website or via your dealer.
▪ Prepare the path along which you want to bring the unit inside in
advance.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
Technical engineering data
▪ A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional
Daikin website (publicly accessible).
▪ The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin
extranet (authentication required).
2.2
1
2
Installer reference guide at a
glance
Chapter
Description
General safety
precautions
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
Technical data
Specifications of the system
Glossary
Definition of terms
Field settings table
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
3.2.2
To handle the outdoor unit
CAUTION
To avoid injury, do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium
fins of the unit.
1
Handle the unit using the sling to the left and the handle to the
right. Pull up both sides of the sling at the same time to prevent
disconnection of the sling from the unit.
1
2
1
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
3
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor and indoor unit are delivered on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
7
3 About the box
3.3
Indoor unit
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit
1
2
2
While handling the unit:
▪ Keep both sides of the sling level.
▪ Keep your back straight.
3
After mounting the unit, remove the sling from the unit by pulling
1 side of the sling.
3.2.3
8×
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
1
Lift the outdoor unit. See "3.2.2 To handle the outdoor unit" on
page 7.
2
Remove the accessories at the bottom of the package.
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the
indoor unit
a
b
2×
c
1×
a
b
1×
1×
c
d
1×
1×
ENERG
a
b
c
d
e
f
Y IJA
IE IA
ENERG
e
2×
1×
d
1×
e
1×
f
g
1×
4×
h
4×
i
1×
f
1×
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Y IJA
IE IA
Outdoor unit installation manual
Fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Energy label
Unit mounting plate
Bolts, nuts, washers, spring washers and wire clamp
h
i
3.3.3
Shut-off valves for space heating water circuit
Overpressure bypass valve
General safety precautions
Addendum book for optional equipment
Indoor unit installation manual
Operation manual
Sealing rings for shut-off valves (space heating water
circuit)
Sealing rings for field-supplied shut-off valves (domestic
hot water circuit)
Sealing tape for low voltage wiring intake
To handle the indoor unit
Use the handles at the back and at the bottom to carry the unit.
a
a
b
a
b
Installer reference guide
8
b
Handles at the back of the unit
Handles at the bottom of the unit. Carefully tilt the unit to
the back so that the handles become visible.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
4 About the units and options
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
This chapter contains information about:
Code
Description
S
Integrated tank material: Stainless steel
18
Integrated tank volume
DA
Model series
6V
Backup heater model
G
G=Grey model
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
[blank]=White model
▪ Identifying the indoor unit
▪ Combining outdoor and indoor units
4.3
Combining units and options
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
▪ Combining the indoor unit with options
Drain pan kit (EKDP008D)
4.2
Identification
The drain pan kit is required to gather the drain from the outdoor
unit. The drain pan kit consists of:
NOTICE
▪ Drain pan
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
▪ Installation brackets
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan.
Drain pan heater (EKDPH008CA)
The drain pan heater is required to avoid freezing-up of the drain
pan.
Location
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan heater.
U-beams (EKFT008D)
The U-beams are installation brackets on which the outdoor unit can
be installed.
Model identification
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
Example: ER G A 06 DA V3
Code
Explanation
ER
European split outdoor pair heat pump
G
Medium water temperature – ambient zone: −10~
−20°C
A
Refrigerant R32
06
Capacity class
DA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.2
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
outdoor unit.
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit
User interface used as room thermostat (EKRUDAS)
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat can only be used in
combination with the user interface connected to the indoor unit.
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat needs to be installed
in the room that you want to control.
Identification label: Indoor unit
Location
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the user interface used as room thermostat.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to the indoor unit. This
thermostat can either be wired (EKRTWA) or wireless (EKRTR1).
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
Model identification
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
Example: E HV H 04 S 18 DA 6V G
Code
Description
E
European model
HV
Floor-standing indoor unit with integrated tank
H
H=Heating only
X=Heating/cooling
04
Capacity class
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Digital I/O PCB (EKRP1HB)
The digital I/O PCB is required to provide following signals:
▪ Alarm output
▪ Space heating/cooling On/OFF output
▪ Changeover to external heat source
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
9
5 Application guidelines
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the digital
I/O PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
Demand PCB (EKRP1AHTA)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
To enable the power saving consumption control by digital inputs
you must install the demand PCB.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
demand PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and
outdoor unit
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
Indoor unit
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room
temperature sensor.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure
the room temperature on another location.
Outdoor unit
ERGA04
ERGA06
ERGA08
EHVH/X04
O
—
—
EHVH/X08
—
O
O
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
indoor sensor and addendum book for optional equipment.
5
Application guidelines
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the
user interface is configured with room thermostat
functionality.
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor
or the remote outdoor sensor.
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the Daikin heat pump system.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 47.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor.
INFORMATION
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
indoor unit and a PC. It gives the possibility to update the software of
the indoor unit.
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable and "8 Configuration" on page 47.
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
Pipe bend kit (EKHVTC)
5.2
When the indoor unit is installed in a place with limited space, a pipe
bend kit can be installed to facilitate the connection to the refrigerant
liquid and gas connections of the indoor unit.
For installation instructions, see the instruction sheet of the pipe
bend kit.
Setting up the space heating/
cooling system
The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one
or more rooms.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump
convectors (FWXV).
▪ How many rooms are heated or cooled by the Daikin heat pump
system?
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
Installer reference guide
10
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, Daikin
recommends to follow the setup guidelines below.
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set Emergency [9.5] to Automatic.
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Setup
NOTICE
A
B
An overpressure bypass valve can be integrated in the
system. Keep in mind that this valve might not be shown
on the illustrations.
5.2.1
Single room
a
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
Setup
A
B
a
b
A
B
b
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
Wireless external room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment EKRTR1).
Configuration
Setting
a
Value
Unit temperature control:
A
B
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface used as room thermostat
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as a room thermostat (optional equipment
EKRUDAS).
▪ #: [4.4]
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Benefits
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Heat pump convectors
Benefits
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
Setup
A
B
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
a
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
A
B
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
11
5 Application guidelines
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/4 and X2M/3).
INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the under floor
heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling
operation.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/4 and X2M/3).
Configuration
Setting
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Benefits
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
Altherma LT.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
▪ The excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating
▪ Stylish.
▪ The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Space heating is provided by:
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
▪ The under floor heating
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The
under floor heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
Setup
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface or an
external room thermostat), while the other rooms are controlled by
so-called thermostatic valves, which open or close depending on the
room temperature.
A
B
M1
Setup
a
A
B
a
A
B
C
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
T
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
a
Installer reference guide
12
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
A
B
C
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface used as room thermostat
Configuration
Setting
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the indoor unit.
Unit temperature control:
0 (Leaving water): Unit operation
is decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as a room thermostat (optional equipment
EKRUDAS).
▪ Code: [C-07]
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
▪ #: [4.4]
INFORMATION
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
Heat pump convectors - Multiple rooms
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
Setup
A
B
0 (Single zone): Main
C
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
a
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
A
B
C
a
Setup
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
A
B
C
M1
M2
a
A
B
C
a
b
a
b
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Bypass valve
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
▪ The user interface connected on the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30). The indoor unit will only supply
leaving water temperature when there is an actual demand.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 25.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ The user interface connected on the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each room
thermostat must be set to match the indoor unit.
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, but do
NOT have to be connected to the indoor unit. The indoor unit will
supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to program a
leaving water schedule.
Benefits
Value
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ Code: [7-02]
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
13
5 Application guidelines
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Additional zone = Zone with the highest design temperature in
heating, and the lowest design temperature in cooling.
CAUTION
Setup
A
B
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving
water temperature when the additional zone has demand.
C
Typical example:
M1
Room (zone)
M1
Living room (main zone)
a
A
B
C
a
b
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Under floor heating:
b
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the indoor unit.
▪ In heating: 35°C
▪ In
cooling:
20°C
(only
refreshment, no real cooling
allowed)
Bed rooms (additional zone)
Heat pump convectors:
▪ In heating: 45°C
▪ In cooling: 12°C
Setup
A
B
▪ For each room with under floor heating: Two shut-off valves (field
supply) are installed before the under floor heating:
C
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has
no heating demand
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during
cooling operation of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
a
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
d
c
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each external
room thermostat and remote controller of the heat pump
convectors must be set to match the indoor unit.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [2.9]
Value
0 (Leaving water): Unit operation
is decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
D
E
b
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
a
A
B
C
D
E
a
b
c
d
Additional leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 3
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
User interface used as room thermostat
Mixing valve station
Pressure regulating valve
INFORMATION
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ For the main zone:
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
▪ The pump of the mixing valve station is controlled by the ON/
OFF signal on the indoor unit (X2M/29 and X2M/21; normal
closed shut-off valve output).
In this document:
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat (optional equipment EKRUDAS).
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating,
and the highest design temperature in cooling
Installer reference guide
14
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
▪ For the additional zone:
5.3
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30). The indoor unit will only
supply the desired additional leaving water temperature when
there is an actual demand.
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each remote
controller of the heat pump convectors must be set to match the
indoor unit.
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The indoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the indoor unit or the
auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the indoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the indoor unit.
Configuration
INFORMATION
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
Note:
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat pump operates to achieve the desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weatherdependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
▪ Main room = user interface
used as room thermostat
functionality
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
Setup
▪ Integrate the auxiliary boiler as follows:
1 (Dual zone): Main + additional
▪ #: [4.4]
a
b c de g
f
h
j
▪ Code: [7-02]
M
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (1 contact): When the used
external room thermostat or
External room thermostat for the
heat pump convector can only
additional zone:
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ #: [3.A]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
▪ Code: [C-06]
Shut-off valve output
Set to follow the thermo demand
of the main zone.
Shut-off valve
If the main zone must be shut off
during cooling mode to prevent
condensation on the floor, set it
accordingly.
At the mixing valve station
h
f
i
k
l
i
n
FHL1
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature for heating
and/or cooling.
m
FHL2
FHL3
Benefits
▪ Comfort.
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors.
▪ Efficiency.
▪ Depending on the demand, the indoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Motorised 3‑way valve
Non-return valve (field supply)
Shut-off valve (field supply)
Collector (field supply)
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
Aquastat valve (field supply)
DHW tank (EHBH/X: option)
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with Altherma LT.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
15
5 Application guidelines
K2A
Indoor
Auto
Boiler
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Indoor unit
Automatic
Boiler
NOTICE
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already pre-mounted in the indoor unit.
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank
▪ Install the digital I/O PCB (option EKRP1HB).
▪ Connect X1 and X2 (changeover to external heat source) on the
digital I/O PCB to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating/
cooling system" on page 10.
Configuration
a
b c
UI
d f
hh
i
M
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
e
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
FHL1
g
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
FHL1...3
UI
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating/cooling system" on page 10).
5.4.2
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
▪ A manually operated contact
▪ …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
L
Com
Indoor
X2M
35 30
Indoor/Auto/Boiler
A
N
BTI
A
H
K1A
K1A
K1A
BTI
X Y
K2A
Boiler thermostat input
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
Auxiliary relay for activation of indoor unit (field supply)
Installer reference guide
16
K2A
FHL3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Motorised 3‑way valve
DHW tank
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
Under floor heating
User interface
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
▪ An electricity tariff contact
H
FHL2
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank.
Determining the DHW consumption
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using typical water volumes:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
Question
Typical water volume
How many showers are needed
per day?
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
How many baths are needed per 1 bath = 150 l
day?
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. In case you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, Daikin recommends to produce the domestic
hot water during the night when there is lower space heating
demand.
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
Are there any other domestic hot —
water needs?
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day
is as follows:
▪ 3 showers
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ Electrical backup heater
▪ 1 bath
▪ For more information about optimizing the energy consumption for
producing domestic hot water, see "8 Configuration" on page 47.
▪ 3 sink volumes
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water
Setup
h
Example
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
c
If:
▪ V2=180 l
i
a
▪ T2=54°C
a
b
c
f
g
h
i
Then V1=280 l
If:
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V2=307 l
V1
V2
T2
T1
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
DHW tank temperature
Cold water temperature
Possible DHW tank volumes
Type
Integrated DHW tank
g
b
▪ T1=15°C
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
f
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ For more information about connecting
connection: see "7 Installation" on page 29.
the
recirculation
Configuration
Possible volumes
▪ 180 l
▪ 230 l
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 47.
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the heat pump can increase this
temperature. However, this consumes more energy. Daikin
recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature below
55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection
Setup
h
c
i
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
d
f
e
g
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Heater element (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
Daikin recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, Daikin recommends
to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
▪ For the integrated DHW tank, the temperature of the DHW tank
can be set to maximum 60°C. If applicable legislation requires
higher temperature for disinfection, you can connect a DHW pump
and heater element as shown above.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
17
5 Application guidelines
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
Configuration
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ Setup and configuration: When using electrical power meters, set
the number of pulses/kWh for each power meter via the user
interface.
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 47.
5.5
INFORMATION
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
▪ Produced heat
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Consumed energy
▪ You can read out the energy data:
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
▪ For space heating
Setup
▪ For space cooling
Connect the power meter to X5M/5 and X5M/6.
▪ For domestic hot water production
Power meter type
In case of…
▪ You can read out the energy data:
Use a… power meter
▪ Per month
▪ Single-phase outdoor unit
▪ Per year
▪ Backup heater supplied from a
single-phase grid (i.e. the
backup heater model is *3V or
*6V connected to a singlephase grid)
INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
▪ Three-phase outdoor unit
5.5.1
Produced heat
INFORMATION
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
Single-phase
Three-phase
▪ Backup heater supplied from a
three-phase grid (i.e. the
backup heater model is *9W or
*6V connected to a threephase grid)
Example
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
Single-phase power meter
Three-phase power meter
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
▪ Setup and configuration: No additional equipment needed.
5.5.2
Consumed energy
b
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
c
▪ Calculating
0 5
1 0
a


c
c
b
d
▪ Measuring
d
INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example: for backup heater) and measuring the
consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so,
the energy data will be invalid.
Calculating the consumed energy
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the backup heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for the backup heater (step 1).
A
e
e f
B
A
f
g
B
A Outdoor unit
A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
B Indoor unit
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
d Fuse (L1/N)
e Indoor unit (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
f Backup heater (L1/N)
f Indoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
Installer reference guide
18
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
Exception
5.6
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of outdoor unit, indoor unit and backup heater).
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X5M/3 and X5M/4.
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
▪ Permanently
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 19 for
an example with two power meters.
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. indoor unit and backup
heater).
▪ By digital inputs
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
Pi
DI
Setup
Permanent power limitation
a
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X5M/5 and X5M/6.
b
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X5M/3 and X5M/4.
Power meter types
t
▪ Power meter 1: Single- or three-phase power meter according to
the power supply of the outdoor unit.
Pi
t
DI
a
b
▪ Power meter 2:
▪ In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a
single-phase power meter.
▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
Power input
Time
Digital input (power limitation level)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Setup and configuration
▪ No additional equipment needed.
Example
Single-phase outdoor unit with a three-phase backup heater:
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user
interface
(for
the
description
of
all
settings,
see
"8 Configuration" on page 47):
▪ Select continuous limitation mode
0 5
1 0
b
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
c
e
g
A
e


d
NOTICE
Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to
guarantee:
f
h
▪ Defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is interrupted
several times, the heat exchanger will freeze up.
i
▪ Space heating and DHW production by allowing the
backup heater step 1.
B
A
B
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
Power meter (L1/N)
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
Fuse (L1/N)
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
Indoor unit (L1/N)
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Current (in A)
▪ Power input (in kW)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
19
5 Application guidelines
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
Ph
c
b
C
a
A8P
a
A
5
4
3
2
1
Ph
Ce
A
B
a
b
c
b
A
B
A
B
C
a
b
Pi
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Energy management system
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
Backup heater
5.7
a
DI1
B
Ce
Produced heat
Consumed energy
Outdoor unit
Backup heater
Limited outdoor unit operation
Full outdoor unit operation
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the indoor or outdoor ambient temperature. Daikin recommends to
use an external temperature sensor in the following cases:
DI3
Indoor ambient temperature
b
DI4
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface used as room
thermostat (EKRUDAS) measures the indoor ambient
temperature. Therefore, the user interface used as room
thermostat must be installed on a location:
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Power input
Time
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
▪ Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
Setup
▪ That is NOT near a heat source
▪ Demand PCB (option EKRP1AHTA) needed.
▪ That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of,
for example, door opening/closing
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are
corresponding power limitation level:
used
to
activate
the
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user
interface
(for
the
description
of
all
settings,
see
"8 Configuration" on page 47):
▪ Select limitation by digital inputs.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each
digital input.
INFORMATION
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heater.
Therefore, the electrical heater is limited and turned OFF first. The
system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Turns OFF the backup heater.
2
Limits the outdoor unit.
3
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
Example
If the configuration is as follows: Power limitation level does NOT
allow operation of backup heater (step 1).
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
Installer reference guide
20
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote indoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select room sensor [9.B].
Outdoor ambient temperature
Configuration
5.6.3
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
indoor sensor (option KRCS01-1).
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured.
Therefore, the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
▪ At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where
the most heat emitters are located
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
outdoor sensor (option EKRSCA1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote outdoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [9.B].
▪ When the power saving functionality of the outdoor unit is active
(see "8 Configuration" on page 47), the outdoor unit is turned
down to reduce standby energy losses. As a result, the outdoor
ambient temperature is NOT read out.
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the
full time outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is
another reason to install the optional outdoor ambient temperature
sensor.
INFORMATION
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves and in the automatic heating/cooling changeover
logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the
outdoor unit is always used.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
6
Preparation
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
6.1
Overview: Preparation
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
It contains information about:
▪ Preparing the installation site
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ Preparing the refrigerant piping
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation
conditions, the measured value might be higher than the sound
pressure level mentioned in Sound spectrum in the data book due
to environmental noise and sound reflections.
▪ Preparing the water piping
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
6.2
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
Preparing the installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit MUST be covered.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
Choose an installation location with sufficient space for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
WARNING
The appliance shall be stored in a room without
continuously operating ignition sources (example: open
flames, an operating gas appliance or an operating electric
heater).
WARNING
DO NOT reuse refrigerant piping that has been used with
any other refrigerant. Replace the refrigerant pipes or
clean thoroughly.
6.2.1
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly
exposed to sea winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high
levels of salt in the air, which might shorten the life of the unit.
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.
b
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
a
c
INFORMATION
Also read the following requirements:
▪ General installation site requirements.
"General safety precautions" chapter.
See
the
▪ Refrigerant piping requirements (length, height
difference). See further in this "Preparation" chapter.
▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
Mind the following spacing guidelines:
>250
If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a
windbreaker.
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the
windbreaker.
>350
d
b
a
(mm)
a
>250
>350
≤1200
b >250
b
a
(mm)
a
b
c
d
c
Air outlet
Air inlet
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
a
b
c
d
Sea wind
Building
Outdoor unit
Windbreaker
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for the
following ambient temperatures:
Cooling mode
10~43°C
Heating mode
–25~25°C
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
21
6 Preparation
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
6.2.3
In areas with low ambient temperatures and high humidity, or in
areas with heavy snowfall, remove the suction grille to ensure proper
operation.
Non-exhaustive list of areas: Austria, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, Germany, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Norway,
Poland, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Sweden, …
Installation site requirements of the
indoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ The indoor unit is designed for indoor installation only and for the
following ambient temperatures:
1
Remove the screws holding the suction grille.
▪ Space heating operation: 5~30°C
2
Remove the suction grille, and dispose of it.
▪ Space cooling operation: 5~35°C
3
Reattach the screws to the unit.
▪ Domestic hot water production: 5~35°C
▪ Mind the following measurements guidelines:
4×
30 m
Minimum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
3 m
Maximum height difference between indoor unit and
outdoor unit
20 m
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
3
2
a
≥300
1
Maximum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
≥500
≥600
a
Suction grille
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
(mm)
INFORMATION
a
c
d
b
e
c
a
b
c
d
e
Snow cover or shed
Pedestal
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
EKFT008D option kit
In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above
the maximum expected level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting the
outdoor unit" on page 31 for more details.
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation
site where the snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is
possible, make sure that the heat exchanger coil is NOT affected by
the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or shed and a pedestal.
If you have limited installation space, do the following
before installing the unit in its final position: "7.8.5 To
connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40. It
requires to remove one or both side panels.
▪ The foundation must be strong enough to bear the weight of the
unit. Take the weight of the unit with a domestic hot water tank full
of water into account.
Make sure, in the event of a water leak, water cannot cause any
damage to the installation space and surroundings.
Do NOT install the unit in places such as:
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible. Ambient temperature around the
indoor unit must be >5°C.
Special requirements for R32
WARNING
▪ Do NOT pierce or burn.
▪ Do NOT use means to accelerate the defrosting
process or to clean the equipment, other than those
recommended by the manufacturer.
▪ Be aware that R32 refrigerant does NOT contain an
odour.
Installer reference guide
22
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
WARNING
The appliance shall be stored so as to prevent mechanical
damage and in a well-ventilated room without continuously
operating ignition sources (example: open flames, an
operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater)
and have a room size as specified below.
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT re-use joints which have been used already.
▪ Joints made in installation between parts of refrigerant
system shall be accessible for maintenance purposes.
WARNING
Make sure installation, servicing, maintenance and repair
comply with instructions from Daikin and with applicable
legislation (for example national gas regulation) and are
executed only by authorised persons.
NOTICE
▪ Pipework shall be protected from physical damage.
▪ Installation of pipework shall be kept to a minimum.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
23
6 Preparation
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is <1.84 kg (i.e. if the piping length is <27 m), there are no additional minimum floor area
requirements.
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is ≥1.84 kg (i.e. if the piping length is ≥27 m), you need to comply with additional minimum
floor area requirements as described in the following flow chart. The flow chart uses the following tables: "14.5 Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant
charge allowed in a room: indoor unit" on page 95, "14.6 Table 2 – Minimum floor area: indoor unit" on page 95 and "14.7 Table 3 –
Minimum venting opening area for natural ventilation: indoor unit" on page 95.
INFORMATION
Multiple indoor units. If two or more indoor units are
installed in a room, you must consider the maximum
refrigerant charge that can be released in the room when a
SINGLE leak occurs. Example: If two indoor units are
installed in the room, each with its own outdoor unit, then
you have to consider the refrigerant charge of the largest
indoor-outdoor combination.
a
Input from installer:
▪ Area of adjacent room B (Aroom B) (m2)
Input from installer:
▪ Total refrigerant charge (mc) (kg)
▪ Area of room A (Aroom A) (m2)
B
≥1.5 m
A
Start
a Indoor unit
A Room where the indoor unit is installed.
B Room adjacent to room A.
Use table 2 in chapter "Technical data" to
calculate the total minimum floor area
(Amin total) (m2) required for the total refrigerant
charge (mc).
Use table 1 in chapter "Technical data" to
calculate the maximum refrigerant charge
(mmax) (kg) allowed for room A.
Amin total≤Aroom A+Aroom B?
mmax≥mc?
No
No
Yes
Determine the refrigerant amount that exceeds
mmax (dm) (kg). (dm=mc–mmax)
Yes
The unit can be installed in room A, and
without further room size or ventilation
requirements.
Use table 3 in chapter "Technical data" and
dm to calculate the minimum opening area for
natural ventilation between room A and
room B (VAmin) (cm2).
Contact your dealer.
Unit can be installed at room A if:
▪ 2 ventilation openings (permanently open) are provided between room A and B, 1 at the top and 1 at the bottom.
▪ Bottom opening: The bottom opening must meet the minimum area requirements (VAmin). It must be as close as possible to the floor. If the ventilation opening
starts from the floor, the height must be ≥20 mm. The bottom of the opening must be situated ≤100 mm from the floor. At least 50% of the required opening
area must be situated <200 mm from the floor. The entire area of the opening must be situated <300 mm from the floor.
▪ Top opening: The area of the top opening must be larger than or equal to the bottom opening. The bottom of the top opening must be situated at least 1.5 m
above the top of the bottom opening.
▪ Ventilation openings to the outside are NOT considered suitable ventilation openings (the user can block them when it is cold).
Installer reference guide
24
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
6.3
Preparing refrigerant piping
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Piping material: Phosphoric acid deoxidised seamless copper.
▪ Piping diameter:
Ø6.4 mm (1/4")
Gas piping
Ø15.9 mm (5/8")
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
▪ Piping temper grade and thickness:
Temper grade
Annealed (O)
≥0.8 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
Annealed (O)
≥1.0 mm
6.3.2
▪ Closed circuit. Use the indoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
Thickness (t)(a)
6.4 mm (1/4")
(a)
Ø
t
Depending on the applicable legislation and the unit's
maximum working pressure (see "PS High" on the unit
name plate), larger piping thickness might be required.
Refrigerant piping insulation
▪ Use polyethylene foam as insulation material:
▪ with a heat transfer rate between 0.041 and 0.052 W/mK (0.035
and 0.045 kcal/mh°C)
▪ with a heat resistance of at least 120°C
▪ Insulation thickness
Pipe outer diameter
(Øp)
Insulation inner
diameter (Øi)
Insulation thickness
(t)
6.4 mm (1/4")
8~10 mm
10 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
16~20 mm
13 mm
Øp
Øi
t
Preparing water piping
▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the
expansion vessel (if equipped) MUST be open.
6.4.1
▪ Glycol. For safety reasons, it is NOT allowed to add any kind of
glycol to the water circuit.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 89 for the external
static pressure curves of the indoor unit.
▪ Water flow. You can find the minimum required water flow for
indoor unit operation in the following table. In all cases, this flow
needs to be guaranteed. When the flow is lower, the indoor unit
will stop operation and display error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
12 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water. Only use materials that are
compatible with water used in the system and with the materials
used in the indoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
6.4
▪ Only use clean pipes
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
Liquid piping
Outer diameter
(Ø)
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
Water circuit requirements
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 4 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve, connections,…) MUST withstand the following
temperatures:
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
NOTICE
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen
diffusion tight according to DIN 4726. The diffusion of
oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
25
6 Preparation
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.4.6 Tank" on
page 63.
89°C
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
b
j
k
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
i
75°C
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
i
a
c
d
g
f
h
FCU1
i
M
e M
f
FCU3
a
i
FHL1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FCU1...3
FHL1...3
FCU2
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
FHL2
FHL3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Stop valve
Motorised 3-way valve
Motorised 2-way valve (field supply)
Collector
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Recirculation connection
Hot water connection
Shower
Recirculation pump
▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the
expansion vessel (if equipped) MUST be open.
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
The indoor unit has an expansion vessel of 10 litre with a factory-set
pre-pressure of 1 bar.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Connect the drain hose
properly to the drain to avoid water dripping out of the unit. See
"7.8.5 To connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. Two automatic air
purges are provided in the indoor unit. Check that the air purges
are NOT tightened too much, so that automatic release of air in
the water circuit is possible.
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
Minimum water volume
There are no requirements for the minimum water volume.
INFORMATION
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
a
b c
d
f
g
T1
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
M1
T2
M2
h
T3
M3
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
Installer reference guide
26
e f
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
h
FHL1...3
T1...3
M1...3
Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Individual room thermostat (optional)
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating or operation).
Maximum water volume
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
a
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
12 l/min
2.4
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 77.
2
6.4.4
1.5
1
NOTICE
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
0.5
0.3
20
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
50
100
a
b
150
200
250
290
b
Pre-pressure (bar)
Maximum water volume (l)
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel prepressure
Installation
height
difference(a)
≤7 m
Water volume
≤200 l
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
>200 l
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader
valve of the expansion vessel.
Do the following:
▪ Decrease the prepressure according to
the required installation
height difference. The
pre-pressure
should
decrease by 0.1 bar for
each metre below 7 m.
a
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
>7 m
Do the following:
▪ Increase
the
prepressure according to
the
required
installation
height
difference. The prepressure
should
increase by 0.1 bar for
each metre above 7 m.
The expansion vessel of
the indoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
recommended to install
an extra vessel outside
the unit.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
(a)
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the indoor unit. If the indoor unit is
at the highest point of the installation, the installation height
is 0 m.
Minimum flow rate
Check that the minimum flow rate in the installation is guaranteed in
all conditions. This minimum flow rate is required during defrost/
backup heater operation. For this purpose, use the overpressure
bypass valve delivered with the unit.
a
6.4.5
Schrader valve
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
The indoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
No actions or adjustments are required.
Example 2
The indoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 250 l.
Actions:
▪ Because the total water volume (250 l) is more than the default
water volume (200 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 290 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
27
6 Preparation
▪ Because 250 l is lower than 290 l, the expansion vessel is
appropriate for the installation.
The indoor unit is designed to receive an input signal by which the
unit switches into forced off mode. At that moment, the outdoor unit
compressor will not operate.
6.5
Preparing electrical wiring
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except
external actuators
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
Normal power
supply
WARNING
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
b
a
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
0 0 58
Power supply is
interrupted
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
0 0 580
0 5
1 0
b
0 0 580
1 50
1 50
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
3
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
1
3
2
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
1
5
3
4
1
2
2
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
Remark: The
indoor unit must be
electricity company
must always allow the powered by a
power consumption separate normal
power supply.
of the indoor unit.
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
WARNING
▪ All wiring MUST be performed by an authorised
electrician and MUST comply with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
a
b
1
2
3
4
5
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction MUST comply with the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
6.5.4
WARNING
4
Normal power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply for outdoor unit
Power supply and interconnection cable to indoor unit
Power supply for backup heater
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the indoor unit
PCB in the event of power supply interruption of the
preferential kWh rate power supply)
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
Item
6.5.2
Wires
Maximum
running
current
About preferential kWh rate power supply
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
Outdoor unit and indoor unit power supply
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2
Power supply and
3
interconnection cable to
indoor unit
3
Power supply for
backup heater
See table below. —
4
Preferential kWh rate
power supply (voltage
free contact)
2
5
Normal kWh rate power 2
supply
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
Installer reference guide
2+GND
(a)
1
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
28
Description
(f)
(d)
6.3 A
Optional equipment
6
User interface used as 2
room thermostat
Final English - Tanslations in progress
(e)
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
7
Room thermostat
3 or 4
100 mA(b)
8
Outdoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
9
Indoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
10
Heat pump convector
2
100 mA
INFORMATION
If you have limited installation space, do the following
before installing the unit in its final position: "7.8.5 To
connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40. It
requires to remove one or both side panels.
INFORMATION
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
(b)
Field supplied components
11
Shut-off valve
2
100 mA(b)
12
Electricity meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
13
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(b)
14
Alarm output
2
(b)
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
15
Changeover to external 2
heat source control
(b)
▪ When connecting the refrigerant piping
16
Space cool/heat
operation control
2
(b)
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
18
Safety thermostat
2
(d)
(f)
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m.
Cable section 1.5 mm².
NOTICE
More technical specifications of the different connections
are indicated on the inside of the indoor unit.
Backup heater
type
Power supply
Required number of
conductors
*3V
1N~ 230 V
2+GND
*6V
1N~ 230 V
2+GND
3~ 230 V
3+GND
3N~ 400 V
4+GND
*9W
7.2.1
About opening the units
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
17
(e)
Opening the units
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
(b)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
7.2
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
See "7.5.8 To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit" on
page 36 and "7.9.6 To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor
unit" on page 41.
7.2.3
1
To open the indoor unit
Remove the top panel.
5×
7
Installation
7.1
Overview: Installation
T25
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
1
Mounting the outdoor unit.
2
Mounting the indoor unit.
3
Connecting the refrigerant piping.
4
Checking the refrigerant piping.
5
6
7
Charging refrigerant.
Connecting the water piping.
Connecting the electrical wiring.
8
9
Finishing the outdoor installation.
Finishing the indoor installation.
2
Remove the user interface panel. Open the hinges at the top
and slide the top panel upwards.
NOTICE
If you remove the user interface panel, also disconnect the
cables from the back of the panel to prevent damage.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
29
7 Installation
1
1
2
3
3
If necessary, remove the front plate. This is, for example,
necessary in the following cases:
▪ "7.2.5 To lower the switch box on the indoor unit" on
page 30
▪ "7.8.5 To connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40
▪ When you need access to the high voltage switch box
4×
T25
7.2.5
To lower the switch box on the indoor unit
During the installation, you will need access to the inside of the
indoor unit. To have easier front access, put the switch box lower on
the unit as follows:
Prerequisite: The user interface panel and front panel have been
removed.
2×
T25
1
Remove the top panel that keeps the switch box into place at
the top of the unit.
2
Tilt the switch box to the front and lift it out of its hinges.
2×
T25
1
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the
indoor unit
2
3
Place the switch box lower on the unit. Use the 2 hinges located
lower on the unit.
3
4×
T25
3
Installer reference guide
30
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
7.3
a
Mounting the outdoor unit
Maximum snowfall height
Option 2: On plastic mounting feet
7.3.1
In this case, you can use the bolts, nuts, washers and spring
washers delivered with the unit as accessories.
About mounting the outdoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Providing the installation structure.
2
3
4
5
Installing the outdoor unit.
Providing drainage.
Preventing the unit from falling over.
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 21.
0 mm
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
The EKFT008D option kit is recommended in areas with heavy
snowfall.
0 mm
▪ Preparation
7.3.3
Option 3: On a pedestal with the EKFT008D option kit
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
This topic shows different installation structures. For all, use 4 sets
of M8 or M10 anchor bolts, nuts and washers. In any case, provide
at least 300 mm of free space below the unit. Additionally, make
sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above the maximum
expected level of snow.
60
0
15
<
0
>300
30
The maximum height of the upper protruding part of the
bolts is 15 mm.
a
INFORMATION
0
100
<
15
0
b
Option 1: On mounting feet "flexi-foot with strut"
(mm)
0 mm
a
b
Maximum snowfall height
EKFT008D option kit
Option 4: On brackets to the wall with the EKFT008D option kit
The EKFT008D option kit is recommended in areas with heavy
snowfall.
0
15
<
a
>300
60
0
>100
30
0
(mm)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
31
7 Installation
4×
a
2
a
c
>2
50
1
3
2×
a
Air outlet
NOTICE
b
3
Remove the protective cardboard and instruction sheet.
a
>300
Properly align the unit. Make sure the backside of the unit
does NOT protrude.
b
(mm)
a
b
c
Maximum snowfall height
EKFT008D option kit
Anti-vibration rubber (field supply)
a
a
b
7.3.5
Protective cardboard
Instruction sheet
To provide drainage
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water away from the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does NOT
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent water
from getting into the unit and to avoid drain water dripping (see the
following figure).
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT remove the protective cardboard before the unit is
installed properly.
1
Lift the outdoor unit as described in "3.2.2 To handle the
outdoor unit" on page 7.
NOTICE
2
Install the outdoor unit as follows:
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are blocked up,
provide space of at least 300 mm below the outdoor unit.
▪ (1) Put the unit into position (using the sling to the left and
the handle to the right).
▪ (2) Remove the sling (by pulling 1 side of the sling).
▪ (3) Fix the unit.
Installer reference guide
32
▪ Drain pan. You can use the drain pan option (EKDP008D) to
gather the drain water. For the complete installation instructions,
see the installation manual of the drain pan. In short, the drain pan
must be installed level (with a tolerance of 1° at all sides) and as
follows:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
c
a
b
a
b
c
Drain pan
U-beams
Drain hole insulation
7.4
Mounting the indoor unit
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the indoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
Installing the indoor unit.
0
m
m
1
60
35
5m
m
7.4.2
▪ Drain pan heater. You can use the drain pan heater option
(EKDPH008CA) to prevent freezing-up of the drain pan. For the
installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan heater.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Non-heated drain tube. When using the drain pan heater without
drain tube or with a non-heated drain tube, remove the drain hole
insulation (Item c on the illustration).
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
Precautions when mounting the indoor
unit
▪ Preparation
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit
1
Lift the indoor unit from the pallet and place it on the floor. Also
see "3.3.3 To handle the indoor unit" on page 8.
2
Connect the drain hose to the drain. See "7.8.5 To connect the
drain hose to the drain" on page 40.
3
Slide the indoor unit into position.
4
Adjust the height of the leveling feet to compensate for floor
irregularities. The maximum allowed deviation is 1°.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
≤1°
Installer reference guide
33
7 Installation
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do NOT tilt the unit forwards:
Take the following precautions on refrigerant piping into
account:
▪ Avoid anything but the designated refrigerant to get
mixed into the refrigerant cycle (e.g. air).
▪ Only use R32 when adding refrigerant.
▪ Only use installation tools (e.g. manifold gauge set) that
are exclusively used for R32 installations to withstand
the pressure and to prevent foreign materials (e.g.
mineral oils and moisture) from mixing into the system.
▪ Install the piping so that the flare is NOT subjected to
mechanical stress.
▪ Protect the piping as described in the following table to
prevent dirt, liquid or dust from entering the piping.
1° 1°
0°
7.5
Connecting the refrigerant piping
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping
▪ Use caution when passing copper tubes through walls
(see figure below).
Before connecting the refrigerant piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Unit
Connecting the refrigerant piping involves:
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit
Installation period
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
<1 month
Pinch or tape the pipe
INFORMATION
▪ Pipe bending
Do NOT open the refrigerant stop valve before checking
the refrigerant piping. When you need to charge additional
refrigerant it is recommended to open the refrigerant stop
valve after charging.
▪ Flaring pipe ends
▪ Brazing
▪ Using the stop valves
7.5.2
Pinch the pipe
Regardless of the
period
▪ Insulating the refrigerant piping
▪ Keeping in mind the guidelines for:
Protection method
>1 month
Precautions when connecting the
refrigerant piping
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the
refrigerant piping
Take the following guidelines into account when connecting pipes:
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ Coat the flare inner surface with ether oil or ester oil when
connecting a flare nut. Tighten 3 or 4 turns by hand, before
tightening firmly.
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
▪ ALWAYS use 2 wrenches together when loosening a flare nut.
CAUTION
▪ Do NOT use mineral oil on flared part.
▪ Do NOT reuse piping from previous installations.
▪ NEVER install a drier to this R32 unit to guarantee its
lifetime. The drying material may dissolve and damage
the system.
▪ ALWAYS use a spanner and torque wrench together to tighten the
flare nut when connecting the piping. This to prevent nut cracking
and leaks.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
Installer reference guide
34
Torque wrench
Spanner
Piping union
Flare nut
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Piping size
(mm)
Tightening
Flare
torque (N•m) dimensions (A)
(mm)
Ø6.4
15~17
8.7~9.1
Ø15.9
63~75
19.3~19.7
Flare shape
(mm)
a
To flare the pipe end
CAUTION
▪ Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Do NOT re-use flares. Use new flares to prevent
refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Use flare nuts that are included with the unit. Using
different flare nuts may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
Pipe bending guidelines
Use a pipe bender for bending. All pipe bends should be as gentle
as possible (bending radius should be 30~40 mm or larger).
7.5.5
c
90°±2
45 ±
° 2
A
R=0.4~0.8
7.5.4
b
f
Refrigerant piping
Part to be brazed
Taping
Manual valve
Pressure-reducing valve
Nitrogen
▪ Do NOT use anti-oxidants when brazing pipe joints.
Residue can clog pipes and break equipment.
▪ Do NOT use flux when brazing copper-to-copper refrigerant
piping. Use phosphor copper brazing filler alloy (BCuP), which
does not require flux.
Flux has an extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping
systems. For instance, if chlorine based flux is used, it will cause
pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will
deteriorate the refrigerant oil.
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port
To handle the stop valve
1
Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2
Remove burrs with the cut surface facing down so that the
chips do NOT enter the pipe.
Take the following guidelines into account:
▪ The stop valves are factory closed.
▪ The following figure shows the stop valve parts required when
handling the valve.
a
b
a
b
a
Cut exactly at right angles.
Remove burrs.
3
Remove the flare nut from the stop valve and put the flare nut
on the pipe.
4
Flare the pipe. Set exactly at the position as shown in the
following figure.
A
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
Service port and service port cap
Valve stem
Field piping connection
Stem cap
▪ Keep both stop valves open during operation.
Flare tool for R32
(clutch type)
A
5
0~0.5 mm
Conventional flare tool
Clutch type
Wing nut type
(Ridgid-type)
(Imperial-type)
1.0~1.5 mm
1.5~2.0 mm
Check that the flaring is properly made.
a
▪ Do NOT apply excessive force to the valve stem. Doing so may
break the valve body.
▪ ALWAYS make sure to secure the stop valve with a spanner, then
loosen or tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench. Do NOT place
the spanner on the stem cap, as this could cause a refrigerant
leak.
b
c
a
a
b
c
7.5.6
Flare’s inner surface MUST be flawless.
The pipe end MUST be evenly flared in a perfect circle.
Make sure the flare nut is fitted.
To braze the pipe end
The indoor unit and outdoor unit have flare connections. Connect
both ends without brazing. If brazing should be needed, take the
following into account:
▪ When brazing, blow through with nitrogen to prevent creation of
large quantities of oxidised film on the inside of the piping. This
film adversely affects valves and compressors in the refrigerating
system and prevents proper operation.
▪ Set the nitrogen pressure to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) (just enough so it
can be felt on the skin) with a pressure-reducing valve.
b
a
b
Spanner
Torque wrench
▪ When it is expected that the operating pressure will be low (e.g.
when cooling will be performed while the outside air temperature
is low), sufficiently seal the flare nut in the stop valve on the gas
line with silicon sealant to prevent freezing.
Silicon sealant; make sure there is no gap.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
35
7 Installation
To open/close the stop valve
a
1
Remove the stop valve cover.
2
Insert a hexagonal wrench (liquid side: 4 mm, gas side: 4 mm)
into the valve stem and turn the valve stem:
b
c
a
b
c
2
Connect the gas refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the gas stop valve of the outdoor unit.
NOTICE
Counterclockwise to open.
Clockwise to close.
3
Liquid stop valve
Gas stop valve
Service port
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
When the stop valve CANNOT be turned any further, stop
turning. The valve is now open/closed.
To handle the stem cap
7.5.9
▪ The stem cap is sealed where indicated with the arrow. Do NOT
damage it.
1
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
indoor unit
Connect the liquid stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant liquid connection of the indoor unit.
b
a
▪ After handling the stop valve, tighten the stem cap, and check for
refrigerant leaks.
Item
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Stem cap, liquid side
13.5~16.5
Stem cap, gas side
22.5~27.5
a
b
To handle the service cap
▪ ALWAYS use a charge hose equipped with a valve depressor pin,
since the service port is a Schrader type valve.
2
Connect the gas stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant gas connection of the indoor unit.
▪ After handling the service port, tighten the service port cap, and
check for refrigerant leaks.
Item
NOTICE
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Service port cap
Refrigerant liquid connection
Refrigerant gas connection
11.5~13.9
INFORMATION
7.5.8
1
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
outdoor unit
When the indoor unit is installed in a place with limited
space, an optional pipe bend (EKHVTC) kit can be
installed to facilitate the connection to the refrigerant gas
and liquid connections of the indoor unit. For installation
instructions, see the instruction sheet of the pipe bend kit.
Connect the liquid refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the liquid stop valve of the outdoor unit.
7.6
Checking the refrigerant piping
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping
The outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping has been factory tested
for leaks. You only have to check the outdoor unit's external
refrigerant piping.
1×
Before checking the refrigerant piping
Make sure the refrigerant piping is connected between the outdoor
unit and the indoor unit.
Typical workflow
Checking the refrigerant piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
2
Installer reference guide
36
Checking for leaks in the refrigerant piping.
Performing vacuum drying to remove all moisture, air or
nitrogen from the refrigerant piping.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
If there is a possibility of moisture being present in the refrigerant
piping (for example, water may have entered the piping), first carry
out the vacuum drying procedure below until all moisture has been
removed.
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the
refrigerant piping
a
d
h
b
c
j
e
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
f
g h i
▪ General safety precautions
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
▪ Preparation
NOTICE
Use a 2-stage vacuum pump with a non-return valve that
can evacuate to a gauge pressure of −⁠100.7 kPa
(−⁠1.007 bar)(5 Torr absolute). Make sure the pump oil
does not flow oppositely into the system while the pump is
not working.
NOTICE
Pressure meter
Gauge manifold
Low-pressure valve (Lo)
High-pressure valve (Hi)
Charging hoses
Vacuum pump
Service port
Valve lids
Gas stop valve
Liquid stop valve
1
Vacuum the system until the pressure on the manifold indicates
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
2
Leave as is for 4-5 minutes and check the pressure:
Use this vacuum pump for R32 exclusively. Using the
same pump for other refrigerants may damage the pump
and the unit.
If the pressure…
Then…
Does not change
There is no moisture in the
system. This procedure is
finished.
Increases
There is moisture in the
system. Go to the next step.
NOTICE
▪ Connect the vacuum pump to the service port of the
gas stop valve.
▪ Make sure that the gas stop valve and liquid stop valve
are firmly closed before performing the leak test or
vacuum drying.
7.6.3
3
Vacuum the system for at least 2 hours to a manifold pressure
of −0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
4
After turning the pump OFF, check the pressure for at least
1 hour.
5
NOTICE
If you do NOT reach the target vacuum or CANNOT maintain
the vacuum for 1 hour, do the following:
Do NOT exceed the unit's maximum working pressure (see
"PS High" on the unit name plate).
▪ Check for leaks again.
▪ Perform vacuum drying again.
To check for leaks
NOTICE
NOTICE
Make sure to use a recommended bubble test solution
from your wholesaler. Do not use soap water, which may
cause cracking of flare nuts (soap water may contain salt,
which absorbs moisture that will freeze when the piping
gets cold), and/or lead to corrosion of flared joints (soap
water may contain ammonia which causes a corrosive
effect between the brass flare nut and the copper flare).
Make sure to open the stop valves after installing the
refrigerant piping and performing vacuum drying. Running
the system with the stop valves closed may break the
compressor.
1
Charge the system with nitrogen gas up to a gauge pressure of
at least 200 kPa (2 bar). It is recommended to pressurize to
3000 kPa (30 bar) in order to detect small leaks.
2
Check for leaks by applying the bubble test solution to all
connections.
3
Discharge all nitrogen gas.
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying
Connect the vacuum pump and manifold as follows:
INFORMATION
After opening the stop valve, it is possible that the pressure
in the refrigerant piping does NOT increase. This might be
caused by e.g. the closed state of the expansion valve in
the outdoor unit circuit, but does NOT present any problem
for correct operation of the unit.
7.7
Charging refrigerant
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant
The outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant, but in some
cases the following might be necessary:
What
Charging additional refrigerant
When
When the total liquid piping
length is more than specified
(see later).
Completely recharging refrigerant Example:
▪ When relocating the system.
▪ After a leak.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
37
7 Installation
Charging additional refrigerant
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge
amount
Before charging additional refrigerant, make sure the outdoor unit's
external refrigerant piping is checked (leak test, vacuum drying).
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
If a complete recharge is necessary, the total refrigerant
charge is: the factory refrigerant charge (see unit name
plate) + the determined additional amount.
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
Typical workflow – Charging additional refrigerant typically consists
of the following stages:
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant
WARNING
1 Determining if and how much you have to charge additionally.
▪ Only use R32 as refrigerant. Other substances may
cause explosions and accidents.
2 If necessary, charging additional refrigerant.
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
Completely recharging refrigerant
▪ R32 contains fluorinated greenhouse gases. Its global
warming potential (GWP) value is 675. Do NOT vent
these gases into the atmosphere.
Before completely recharging refrigerant, make sure the following is
done:
▪ When charging refrigerant, ALWAYS use protective
gloves and safety glasses.
1 All refrigerant is recovered from the system.
CAUTION
2 The outdoor unit's external refrigerant piping is checked (leak
test, vacuum drying).
To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
3 Vacuum drying on the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping is
performed.
Prerequisite: Before charging refrigerant, make sure the refrigerant
piping is connected and checked (leak test and vacuum drying).
NOTICE
1
Connect the refrigerant cylinder to the service port.
Before completely recharging, perform vacuum drying on
the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping as well.
2
Charge the additional refrigerant amount.
3
Open the gas stop valve.
Typical workflow – Completely recharging refrigerant typically
consists of the following stages:
If pump down is needed in case of dismantling or relocating the
system, see "13.2 To pump down" on page 87 for more details.
1 Determining how much refrigerant to charge.
7.7.6
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases
label
2 Charging refrigerant.
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
1
Fill in the label as follows:
a
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant
INFORMATION
RXXX
f
2
1
b
2 =
kg
c
1 + 2 =
kg
d
tCO2eq
e
GWP × kg
1000
▪ General safety precautions
a
▪ Preparation
b
c
d
e
To determine the additional refrigerant
amount
WARNING
f
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is ≥1.84 kg
(i.e. if the piping length is ≥27 m), you need to comply
with additional minimum floor area requirements for the
indoor unit. For more information, see "6.2.3 Installation
site requirements of the indoor unit" on page 22.
If the total liquid
piping length is…
kg
GWP: XXX
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
7.7.3
1 =
Do NOT add additional refrigerant.
>10 m
R=(total length (m) of liquid
piping⁠–⁠10 m)×0.020
R=Additional charge (kg)(rounded in units
of 0.1 kg)
If a multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label is
delivered with the unit (see accessories), peel off the
applicable language and stick it on top of a.
Factory refrigerant charge: see unit name plate
Additional refrigerant amount charged
Total refrigerant charge
Greenhouse gas emissions of the total refrigerant charge
expressed as tonnes CO2-equivalent
GWP = Global warming potential
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Then…
≤10 m
=
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
2
Fix the label on the inside of the outdoor unit near the gas and
liquid stop valves.
INFORMATION
Piping length is the one way length of liquid piping.
Installer reference guide
38
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
7.8
7.8.1
Connecting the water piping
NOTICE
About connecting the water piping
To avoid damage to the surroundings in case of water
leakage, it is recommended to close the domestic cold
water inlet shut‑off valves during periods of absence.
Before connecting the water piping
NOTICE
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Connecting the water piping to the indoor unit.
2
3
4
5
Connecting the recirculation piping.
Connecting the drain hose to the drain.
Filling the water circuit.
Filling the domestic hot water tank.
6
Insulating the water piping.
7.8.2
Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory). We
recommend to install the overpressure bypass valve in the
space heating water circuit.
Mind the minimum flow rate when adjusting the
overpressure bypass valve setting. See "6.4.3 To check
the water volume and flow rate" on page 26 and "9.4.1 To
check the minimum flow rate" on page 77.
NOTICE
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
A pressure relief valve (field supply) with an opening
pressure of maximum 10 bar must be installed on the
domestic cold water inlet connection in accordance with
the applicable legislation.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
NOTICE
▪ General safety precautions
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device must be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
▪ Preparation
7.8.3
To connect the water piping
NOTICE
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit.
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves and 1
overpressure bypass valve are provided. Mount the shut-off valves
on the space heating water inlet and space heating water outlet. To
ensure the minimum flow rate (and prevent overpressure), install the
overpressure bypass valve on the space heating water outlet.
1
Install the shut-off valves on the space heating water pipes.
2
Screw the indoor unit nuts on the shut-off valve.
3
Connect the domestic hot water in and out pipes to the indoor
unit.
c
d
a
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
b
7.8.4
To connect the recirculation piping
Prerequisite: Only required if you need recirculation in your system.
a
b
c
d
Space heating/cooling water out
Space heating/cooling water in
Domestic hot water out
Domestic cold water in (cold water supply)
1
Remove the top panel from the unit, see "7.2.3 To open the
indoor unit" on page 29.
2
Cut out the rubber grommet on top of the unit, and remove the
stop. The recirculation connector is placed below the hole.
3
Route the recirculation piping through the grommet and connect
it to the recirculation connector.
NOTICE
It is recommended to install shut-off valves to domestic
cold water in and domestic hot water out connections.
These shut-off valves are field supplied.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
39
7 Installation
Option 2: Through the right side panel
1
4
3×
Reattach the top panel.
7.8.5
3
T25
To connect the drain hose to the drain
2
Water coming from the pressure relief valve is collected in the drain
pan. The drain pan is connected to a drain hose inside the unit. You
must connect the drain hose to an appropriate drain according to the
applicable legislation. You can route the drain hose through the left
or right side panel.
Prerequisite: The user interface panel and front panel have been
removed.
1
Remove one of the side panels.
2
Cut out the rubber grommet.
3
Pull the drain hose through the hole.
4
Reattach the side panel. Ensure the water can flow through the
drain tube.
7.8.6
To fill the water circuit, use a field supply filling kit. Make sure you
comply with the applicable legislation.
INFORMATION
Make sure both air purge valves (one on the magnetic filter
and one on the backup heater) are open.
It is recommended to use a tundish to collect the water.
Option 1: Through the left side panel
7.8.7
2
3×
3
To fill the domestic hot water tank
1
Open every hot water tap in turn to purge air from the system
pipe work.
2
Open the cold water supply valve.
3
Close all water taps after all air is purged.
4
Check for water leaks.
5
Manually operate the field-installed pressure relief valve to
ensure a free water flow through the discharge pipe.
T25
1
To fill the water circuit
7.8.8
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the
heating and cooling capacity.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
7.9
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure:
▪ The refrigerant piping is connected and checked
▪ The water piping is connected
Installer reference guide
40
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Typical workflow
Wire type
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the heat pump.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit.
3
Connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit.
4
Connecting the main power supply.
5
Connecting the backup heater power supply.
6
7
8
9
Connecting the shut–off valves.
Connecting the electrical meters.
Connecting the domestic hot water pump.
Connecting the alarm output.
10
11
12
13
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output.
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source.
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs.
Connecting the safety thermostat.
Installation method
cb
Single-core wire
A
AA´
A´
c
a
a
a Curled single-core wire
b Screw
c Flat washer
cb
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
a
bc
B
B
a
a Terminal
b Screw
7.9.2
About electrical compliance
c Flat washer
Only for ERGA04~08DAV3 (not for ERGA04~08DAV3A)
O Allowed
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic
currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage
systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.).
X NOT allowed
Tightening torques
Only for the backup heater of the indoor unit
M4 (X1M)
See "7.9.9 To connect the backup heater power supply" on
page 44.
M4 (earth)
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
Item
7.9.5
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
ERGA04 +
06DAV3
MCA(a)
a
b
15.9 A
230 V
50 Hz
Must comply with applicable legislation
Interconnection
cable
Minimum cable section of 1.5 mm² and
applicable for 230 V
Recommended
field fuse
20 A
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
Must comply with applicable legislation
(a)
7.9.6
a
24.0 A
1~
Wire
sizes
▪ If stranded conductor wires are used, install a round crimp-style
terminal on the end of the wire. Place the round crimp-style
terminal on the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal
with the appropriate tool.
19.9 A
Phase
WARNING
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
ERGA08DAV3 ERGA04~08D
AV3A
Voltage
Frequen
cy
Keep the following in mind:
b
Specifications of standard wiring
components
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
7.9.4
1.2~1.5
Component
Power
supply
cable
Tightening torque (N•m)
1
25 A
16 A
MCA=Minimum circuit ampacity. Stated values are
maximum values (see electrical data of combination with
indoor units for exact values).
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
Remove the switch box cover.
Stranded conductor wire
Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
41
7 Installation
2×
1×
1×
6
2
Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker and fuse to the power
supply line.
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
b
7.9.7
1
a
b
3
To open the indoor unit, see "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on
page 29 and "7.2.4 To open the switch box cover of the indoor
unit" on page 30.
Strip wire end to this point
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
Connect the interconnection cable and power supply as follows.
Ensure stress relief by using the wire clamp.
To connect the electrical wiring on the
indoor unit
2
The wiring enters the unit from the top:
d
b+c
a
1N~ 50 Hz
220-240 V
d
c
b
a
a, b, c
d
a
b
c
d
3
Interconnection cable
Power supply cable
Fuse
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Field wiring (see table below)
Factory-mounted cable for power supply of backup heater
Routing of the wiring inside the unit should be as follows. Fix
the cable to the cable rail using cable ties:
b+c
4×
L N PWR
1
2 3
L
N
a
3×
a
WARNING
Make sure that the electrical wiring does NOT touch the
refrigerant gas pipe, which can be very hot.
12 3
a
Wire clamp
4
Reattach the switch box cover.
5
Optional: Attach the wire clamp (accessory) to the screw of the
refrigerant piping cover, and fix the cables to it with a cable tie.
a
a Refrigerant gas pipe
Installer reference guide
42
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Routing
Possible cables (depending on unit type
and installed options)
a
▪ Preferential power supply contact
Low voltage
▪ User interface used as room thermostat
(option)
123
123
a
▪ Power consumption digital inputs (field
supply)
▪ Outdoor
(option)
ambient
▪ Indoor ambient
(option)
temperature
sensor
temperature
sensor
123
X11YA
X11Y
X1M
X2M
X11YB
X5M
▪ Electrical meters (field supply)
▪ Safety thermostat (field supply)
b
▪ Interconnection cable
High voltage power
supply
▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
c
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
High voltage control
signal
▪ Room thermostat (option)
X1A
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
Legend: see illustration below.
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
Connect X11Y to X11YB.
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
123
NL
123
NL
S1S
▪ Alarm output
▪ Changeover
control
to
external
heat
a
source
b
c
▪ Space cool/heat operation control
d
▪ Power supply for backup heater
123
High voltage power
supply (factorymounted cable)
56
X1M
X11YA
X11YB
X11Y
X2M
9 10
X5M
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
4
Seal the low voltage wiring intake using the sealing tape
(delivered as accessory).
X1A
Without low voltage cables
With low voltage cables
a
b
c
2
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Preferential power supply contact
Fix the cables with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
7.9.8
1
To connect the main power supply
Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, connect
X11Y to X11YB. The necessity of separate normal kWh
rate power supply to indoor unit (b) X2M/5+6 depends on
the type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Separate connection to the indoor unit is required:
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption of the indoor unit is allowed at
the preferential kWh rate power supply when active.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
43
7 Installation
7.9.9
To connect the backup heater power
supply
Model (power
supply)
Connections to backup heater power
supply
*3V (1N~ 230 V)
WARNING
K1M
SWB
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
2
4
1
3
X6M
1
CAUTION
I
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax
*3V
3 kW
1N~ 230 V
13 A(b)
0.34 Ω
*6V
2 kW
1N~ 230 V
9 A
—
4 kW
1N~ 230 V
17 A(a)(b)
0.22 Ω
6 kW
1N~ 230 V
(a)(b)
0.22 Ω
2 kW
3~ 230 V
5 A
—
4 kW
3~ 230 V
10 A
—
6 kW
3~ 230 V
15 A
—
3 kW
3N~ 400 V
4 A
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
9 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
*9W
(a)
(b)
26 A
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
*6V (1N~ 230 V)
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
Connect the backup heater power supply as follows:
a
I
2
4
Q1DI
The backup heater capacity can vary, depending on the indoor unit
model. Make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the
backup heater capacity, as listed in the table below.
Backup
heater type
3
F1B
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
K5M
SWB
L
N
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
X6M
1
F1B
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
8
Q1DI
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
*6V (3~ 230 V)
K5M
SWB
L
N
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
X6M
1
F1B
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
8
Q1DI
X6M
b
F1B
3~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
Q1DI
a
b
Factory-mounted cable connected to the backup heater
contactor inside the switch box (K1M for *3V models; K5M
for *6V and *9W models)
Field wiring (see table below)
Installer reference guide
44
L1 L2 L3
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Model (power
supply)
S3S S2S
Connections to backup heater power
supply
*9W (3N~ 400 V)
K5M
SWB
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
X6M
1
F1B
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
X2M
X1M
2
8
1
To connect the domestic hot water pump
Connect the domestic hot water pump cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.
M
1~
3N~, 50 Hz
400 V AC
F1B
K1M
K5M
Q1DI
SWB
X6M
7.9.10
1
L1 L2 L3
X5M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.12
Q1DI
3 4 56
M2P
N
Overcurrent fuse (field supply). Recommended fuse for *3V
models: 2‑pole; 20 A; curve 400 V; tripping class C.
Recommended fuse for *6V and *9W models: 4‑pole; 20 A;
curve 400 V; tripping class C.
Contactor (in the lower switch box)
Safety contactor (in the lower switch box)
Earth leakage circuit breaker (field supply)
Switch box
Terminal (field supply)
12
2
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
1
X5M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.13
To connect the shut-off valve
X2M
X1M
To connect the alarm output
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
Wiring is different for a NC (normal closed) valve and a NO
(normal open) valve.
NO
NC
M2S
M2S
b
7 9
X2M
X1M
21 29
21 28
X2M
X1M
X1M
X2M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
X1M
7.9.11
YC
Y1
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
2
To connect the electrical meters
a
b
INFORMATION
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X5M/6 and X5M/4; the negative polarity to X5M/5 and
X5M/3.
1
X5M
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
2
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Prewiring between X2M/7+9 and Q1L (= thermal protector
backup heater). Do NOT change.
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/
OFF output
Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
a
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.14
1
A4P
Installer reference guide
45
7 Installation
S6S
S7S
S8S
S9S
b
7 9
X2M
X1M
X5M
X2M
X1M
X5M
A8P
X801M
12345
a
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
YC
Y2
X1M
a
b
2
a
A4P
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Prewiring between X2M/7+9 and Q1L (= thermal protector
backup heater). Do NOT change.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.15
1
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
a
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.17
1
Installation of EKRP1AHTA is required.
To connect the safety thermostat (normal
closed contact)
Connect the safety thermostat (normal closed) cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
NL
X2M
X1M
9 10
X2M
X1M
X5M
2
X5M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
NOTICE
Make sure to select and install the safety thermostat
according to the applicable legislation.
X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
X4 X3 X2 X1
X2M
a
2
a
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.16
1
A4P
In any case, to prevent unnecessary tripping of the safety
thermostat, it is recommended that …
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
▪ … the safety thermostat is automatically resettable.
▪ … the safety thermostat has a maximum temperature
variation rate of 2°C/min.
▪ … there is a minimum distance of 2 m between the
safety thermostat and the 3‑way valve.
INFORMATION
After it is installed, do NOT forget to configure the safety
thermostat. Without configuration, the indoor unit will
ignore the safety thermostat contact.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
Installer reference guide
46
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
7.10
7.10.1
1
When the configuration wizard is finished, the user
interface will show an overview screen and request to
confirm. When confirmed, the system will restart and the
home screen will be displayed.
To finish the outdoor unit installation
Insulate and fix the refrigerant piping and interconnection cable
as follows:
c
a
b
f
d
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
2
INFORMATION
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
Gas pipe
Gas pipe insulation
Interconnection cable
Liquid pipe
Liquid pipe insulation
Finishing tape
Install the service cover.
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
Method
Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure. To enable breadcrumbs,
press the button in the home screen.
#
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview field settings.
Code
See also:
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 47
7.11
Finishing the indoor unit
installation
7.11.1
To close the indoor unit
▪ "8.6 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 76
8.1.1
1
Close the cover of the switch box.
2
Put the switch box back into place.
3
Reinstall the top panel.
4
Reinstall the side panels.
To access the most used commands
To change the user permission level
You can change the user permission level as follows:
1 Go to [B]: User profile.
2 Enter the applicable code for the user permission.
5
Reinstall the front panel.
6
Reconnect the cables to the user interface panel.
▪ Browse through the list of digits and change the
selected digit.
7
Reinstall the user interface panel.
▪ Confirm the pincode and proceed.
NOTICE
—
▪ Move the cursor from left to right.
Installer pin code
When closing the indoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
The Installer pin code is 5678. Additional menu items and installer
settings are now available.
Installer
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
5678
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
Advanced user pin code
Why
The Advanced user pin code is 1234. Additional menu items for the
user are now visible.
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
User pin code
▪ The calculations of the software
The User pin code is 0000.
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
To access the installer settings
How
You can configure the system via the user interface.
▪ First time – Configuration wizard. When you turn ON the user
interface for the first time (via the indoor unit), the configuration
wizard starts to help you configure the system.
▪ Restart the configuration wizard. If the system is already
configured, you can restart the configuration wizard. To restart the
configuration wizard, go to Installer settings > Configuration
wizard. To access Installer settings, see "8.1.1 To access the
most used commands" on page 47.
▪ Afterwards. If necessary, you can make changes to the
configuration in the menu structure or the overview settings.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [9]: Installer settings.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
All settings can be done using the menu structure. If for any reason it
is required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the
overview settings can be accessed as follows:
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
2 Go to [9.I]: Installer settings > Overview field
settings.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
—
Installer reference guide
47
8 Configuration
3 Turn the left dial to select the first part of the setting
and confirm by pressing the dial.
00
05
0A
For the setting…
Voltage [9.3.2]
Refer to…
"Backup heater" on page 68
Configuration [9.3.3]
0
01
06
0B
Capacity step 1 [9.3.4]
1
02
07
0C
2
03
08
0D
Additional capacity step 2 [9.3.5]
(if applicable)
3
04
09
0E
Main zone
4 Turn the left dial to select the second part of the
setting
Emitter type [2.7]
"8.4.3 Main zone" on
page 53
Control [2.9]
Setpoint mode [2.4]
1
00
05
0A
01 15
06
0B
02
07
0C
03
08
0D
04
09
0E
Heating WD curve [2.5] (if
applicable)
Cooling WD curve [2.6] (if
applicable)
Schedule [2.1]
5 Turn the right dial to modify the value from 15 to 20.
1
Additional zone (only if [4.4]=1)
Emitter type [3.7]
00
05
0A
01 20
06
0B
02
07
0C
Setpoint mode [3.4]
03
08
0D
04
09
0E
Heating WD curve [3.5] (if
applicable)
Control (read only) [3.9]
6 Press the left dial to confirm the new setting.
7 Press the center button to go back to the home
screen.
Cooling WD curve [3.6] (if
applicable)
Schedule [3.1]
Tank
INFORMATION
Heat up mode [5.6]
When you change the overview settings and you go back
to the home screen, the user interface will show a popup
screen and request to restart the system.
Comfort setpoint [5.2]
When confirmed, the system will restart and recent
changes will be applied.
8.2
Configuration wizard
After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you
using the configuration wizard. This way you can set the most
important initial settings. This way the unit will be able to run
properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be done via the
menu structure if required.
"8.4.4 Additional zone" on
page 58
"8.4.6 Tank" on page 63
Eco setpoint [5.3]
Reheat setpoint [5.4]
8.3
Possible screens
8.3.1
Possible screens: Overview
The most common screens are as follows:
a
You can find a short overview of the settings in the configuration
here. All the settings can also be adjusted in the settings menu (use
the breadcrumbs).
For the setting…
Refer to…
b
Language [7.1]
Time/date [7.2]
Hours
—
c
Minutes
Year
Month
+
Day
–
System
Indoor unit type (read only)
"Backup heater" on page 68
a
b
c
Backup heater type [9.3.1]
Domestic hot water [9.2.1]
Emergency [9.5]
Number of zones [4.4]
c1
c2
Home screen
Main menu screen
Lower level screens:
c1: Setpoint screen
c2: Detailed screen with values
"8.4.5 Space heating/
cooling" on page 59
Backup heater
Installer reference guide
48
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
8.3.2
Home screen
Item
Press the
button to go back to the home screen. You see an
overview of the unit configuration and the room and setpoint
temperatures. Only symbols applicable for your configuration are
visible on the home screen.
18 Feb 2018
22:19
j
i
h
h1 Heat emitter type:
h3
h1 h2
▪
: Underfloor heating
▪
: Fancoil unit
▪
: Radiator
e
h2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
55
d
h3 Room thermostat type:
18
c
b
21
g
f
Description
Additional
zone
6
1.6
bar
a
45
: External control
▪
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
Domestic
hot water
i1
Possible actions on this screen
i1
: Domestic hot water
i2 Measured tank temperature
i2
Malfunction
j
Go through the list of the main menu.
or
: A malfunction occurred
See "12.4.1 To display the help text in case of a
malfunction" on page 86 for more information.
Go to the main menu screen.
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.
8.3.3
Item
Description
21 21
The temperatures are shown in circles. If the circle
is grey, the corresponding operation (example:
space heating) is currently not active.
Outdoor
unit
a2 a3
a1
a1
Main menu screen
In the home screen, press
to open the main menu screen.
From the main menu, you can access the different setpoint screens
and submenus.
: Outdoor unit
a2
: Quiet mode active
a3 Measured ambient temperature
Indoor unit / b1 Indoor unit:
domestic
hot water
tank
▪
: Floor-standing
integrated tank
b2
Possible actions on this screen
indoor
unit
Go through the list.
with
Enter the submenu.
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.
b1
tank
▪
Item
: Wall-mounted indoor unit with separated
▪
or
Malfunctioning
b2 Water pressure
c ▪
: Cooling
▪
: Heating
Disinfection
/ Powerful
d ▪
Date / time
e Current date and time
Holiday
f
▪
Main zone
: Disinfection mode active
: Holiday mode active
g3 g4
▪
: Underfloor heating
g1 g2
▪
: Fancoil unit
▪
: Radiator
g2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
g3 Room thermostat type:
▪
▪
Room
Main zone
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
g4 Measured room temperature
Shows the applicable symbol for your main
zone emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
main zone.
Additional zone
Restriction: Only displayed if there are two
leaving water temperature zones. Shows
the applicable symbol for your additional
zone emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
additional zone (if present).
Space heating/
cooling
: Daikin user interface used as room
thermostat
: External control
Restriction: Only displayed if a room
thermostat is connected to the indoor unit.
Set the room temperature.
: Powerful operation active
g1 Heat emitter type:
Restriction: Only displayed if a malfunction
occurs.
See "12.4.1 To display the help text in case
of a malfunction" on page 86 for more
information.
: Wall-mounted indoor unit
Space
operation
mode
Description
Tank
Shows the applicable symbol for your unit.
Put the unit in heating mode or cooling
mode. You cannot change the mode on
heating only models.
Restriction: Only displayed if a domestic
hot water tank is present.
Set the domestic hot water tank
temperature.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
49
8 Configuration
Item
Description
User settings
Gives access to user settings such as
holiday mode and quiet mode.
Information
Displays data and information about the
indoor unit.
Installer settings
Restriction: Only for the installer.
8.3.6
Detailed screen with values
Gives access to advanced settings.
Commissioning
a
Restriction: Only for the installer.
b
a
b
Perform tests and maintenance.
User profile
Change the active user profile.
Operation
Turn heating/cooling functionality and
domestic hot water preparation on or off.
Settings
Values
Possible actions on this screen
Go through the list of settings.
Change the value.
8.3.4
Go to the next setting.
Menu screen
Confirm changes and proceed.
8.3.7
Detailed screen with weather-dependent
curve
Go through the list.
When weather dependent operation is active the desired tank
temperature is determined automatically depending on the averaged
outdoor temperature. When the outdoor temperature is lower the
tank temperature will need to be higher as the water pipes will be
colder and vice versa.
Enter the submenu/setting.
The weather-dependent curves are defined by two setpoints:
Possible actions on this screen
▪ Setpoint (X1, Y2)
8.3.5
Setpoint screen
▪ Setpoint (X2, Y1)
The setpoint screen is displayed for screens describing system
components that need a setpoint value.
Example:
Weather-dependent curve:
a
Y
Y2
▪ Room temperature screen
Y1
▪ Main zone screen
X1
▪ Additional zone screen
X
X2
▪ Tank temperature screen
Possible actions on this screen
e
a2
a1
c
d
b2
d
e
b1
Go through the temperatures.
+
Change the temperature.
d
Go to the next temperature.
–
Confirm changes and proceed.
Item
Possible actions on this screen
a
Description
Possible weather dependent zones:
Go through the list of the submenu.
Go to the submenu.
Adjust and automatically apply the desired
temperature.
Item
Description
▪
: Main zone or additional zone heating
▪
: Main zone or additional zone cooling
▪
: Domestic hot water
X, X1, X2 Outdoor ambient temperature
Y, Y1, Y2 Desired tank temperature or leaving water temperature.
The symbol shown here corresponds to the heat emitter
for that zone:
Minimum temperature limit
a1
Fixed by the unit
a2
Restricted by the installer
Maximum temperature limit
b1
Fixed by the unit
b2
Restricted by the installer
▪
: Underfloor heating
: Fan coil unit
Current temperature
c
Measured by the unit
▪
Desired temperature
d
Turn the right dial to
increase/decrease.
▪
: Radiator
Submenu
e
Turn or press the left dial to
go to the submenu.
▪
: Domestic hot water tank
Installer reference guide
50
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
8.3.8
Schedule screen: Example
This example shows how to set a room temperature schedule in
heating mode for the main zone.
2 Select Edit.
Delete
Edit
INFORMATION
The procedures to program other schedules are similar.
Copy
To program the schedule
Example: You want to program the following schedule:
User defined 1
3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry
with the right dial. You can program up to 6 actions
each day.
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
0
12
6:00 20°C
8:30 18°C
24
Mon
22:00 18°C
--:--
--
17:30 21°C
Prerequisite: The room temperature schedule is only available if
room thermostat control is active. If leaving water temperature
control is active, you can program the main zone schedule instead.
4 Confirm the changes.
To copy the schedule to the other weekdays:
1
Go to the schedule.
2
Clear the contents of the schedule (optional).
3
Program the schedule for Monday.
4
Copy the schedule to the other weekdays.
5
Program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday.
6
Give the schedule a name.
1 Select Monday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
To go to the schedule:
1 Go to [1.1]: Room > Schedule.
2 Select Copy.
2 Set scheduling to Yes.
3 Go to [1.2]: Room > Heating schedule.
To clear the contents of the schedule:
Edit
Copy
1 Select the name of the current schedule.
User defined 1
Result: "C" is displayed next to the copied day.
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
3 Select Tuesday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
2 Select Delete.
C
4 Select Paste.
Delete
Edit
C
Copy
Paste
3 Select OK to confirm.
To program the schedule for Monday:
1 Select Monday.
Result:
User defined 1
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
C
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
51
8 Configuration
5 Repeat this action for all other weekdays.
—
User defined 1
C
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
8.4.1
Malfunction
or
will appear on the home screen.
In case of a malfunction,
If you open the menu screen, the Malfunctioning menu will now be
visible. Open the menu to see the error code. Press to get more
information about the error.
8.4.2
To program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday:
2 Select Edit.
3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry
with the right dial.
12
24
Schedule
In this menu item you can indicate if the room temperature is
controlled with a schedule or not.
Sat
#
8:00 21°C
Code
[1.1]
23:00 18°C
--:--
Setpoint screen
You can control the room temperature of the main zone with the
setpoint screen, also see "8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 50.
1 Select Saturday.
0
Room
Description
N/A
Schedule
▪ 0 No: Room temperature is controlled
by the user.
--
▪ 1 Yes: Room temperature is controlled
with a schedule and can be modified
by the user.
4 Confirm the changes.
5 Select Saturday.
6 Select Copy.
Heating schedule
7 Select Sunday.
This is available for all models.
8 Select Paste.
You can set the room temperature heating schedule using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
Result:
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Cooling schedule
This is available for reversible models.
C
To rename the schedule:
You can set the room temperature cooling schedule using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
Antifrost
INFORMATION
Not all schedules can be renamed.
1 Select the name of the current schedule.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold.
This setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control
method [2.9]. Perform actions according to the table below.
Main zone unit control
method [2.9]
Description
Leaving water temperature
control ([C 07]=0)
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
External room thermostat
control ([C 07]=1)
Allow for the external room
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
2 Select the Rename option.
▪ Turn ON [C.2]: Space heating/
cooling
Room thermostat control ([C
07]=2)
Delete
Rename
Allow for the user interface used as
room thermostat to take care of
room frost protection:
▪ Choose [1.4.1]=1: Room
Antifrost > Activation > Yes
>
▪ Set the room antifrost setpoint
([1.4.2]): Room > Antifrost >
Room setpoint
3 Browse through the character list and confirm the
selected character.
4 Confirm the new name.
INFORMATION
8.4
Settings menu
You can set additional settings using the main menu screen and its
submenus. The most important settings are presented here.
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
For more detailed information about room frost protection in relation
to the applicable unit control method, see the sections below:
Leaving water temperature control ([C‑07]=0)
Installer reference guide
52
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if room antifrost [1.4] is activated, limited
frost protection by the unit is possible:
If...
INFORMATION
When the user interface used as room thermostat is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable), then
room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([9.5]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the unit will stop
and need to be recovered manually via the user interface.
To recover operation manually, go to the Malfunctioning
main menu screen, where the user interface will then ask
you to confirm emergency operation before starting.
Space heating/cooling is ON and The unit will supply leaving water
the operation mode is "heating" to the heat emitters to heat up
the room according to normal
logic.
Space heating/cooling is ON and There is no room frost protection.
the operation mode is "cooling"
External room thermostat control ([C‑07]=1)
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that Space
heating/cooling [C.2] is turned ON and the emergency setting [9.5] is
set to automatic.
Room frost protection is active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
Setpoint range
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control. To save energy by
preventing overheating or undercooling the room, you can limit the
range of the room temperature, both for heating and/or cooling.
NOTICE
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired
room temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are
between the limits.
In case of one leaving water temperature zone:
If...
Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
Space heating/cooling is ON, the
external room thermostat is
"Thermo OFF" and the outdoor
temperature drops below 4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON and Room frost protection is
the external room thermostat is guaranteed by the normal logic.
"Thermo ON"
In case of two leaving water temperature zones:
If...
Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON, the
external room thermostat is
"Thermo OFF", the operation
mode is "heating" and the
outdoor temperature drops below
4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
#
Code
[3-07]
Heating minimum
[1.5.2]
[3-06]
Heating maximum
[1.5.3]
[3-09]
Cooling minimum
[1.5.4]
[3-08]
Cooling maximum
Room sensor offset
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor. It is possible to
give an offset to the room thermistor value measured by the user
interface used as room thermostat or by the external room sensor.
The settings can be used to compensate for situations where the
user interface used as room thermostat or the external room sensor
CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location (see
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on page 20).
#
Code
[1.6]
[2-0A]
[1.7]
[2-09]
#
[1.4.1]
Code
[2-06]
Description
Activation:
▪ 0 No: Antifrost functionality is OFF.
▪ 1 Yes: Antifrost functionality is on.
[1.4.2]
[2-05]
Room setpoint 4°C~16°C
Room sensor offset (external room
sensor option): ONLY applicable if the
external room sensor option is installed
and configured.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
8.4.3
During room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed
if it is enabled. When room frost protection [2‑06] is activated and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature [2‑05],
the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the
room again.
Description
Room sensor offset (user interface used
as room thermostat): Offset on the actual
room temperature measured on the user
interface used as room thermostat.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
Space heating/cooling is ON and There is no room frost protection.
the operation mode is "cooling"
Room thermostat control ([C‑07]=2)
Description
[1.5.1]
Main zone
Setpoint screen
You can set the leaving water temperature for the main zone using
the setpoint screen. For more information about how to do this, see
"8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 50.
Schedule
Indicates if the desired leaving water temperature is according to a
schedule. Influence of the LWT setpoint mode [2.4] is as follows:
▪ In Fixed LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions consist of
desired leaving water temperatures, either preset or custom.
▪ In Weather dependent LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions
consist of desired shift actions, either preset or custom.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
53
8 Configuration
#
[2.1]
Code
N/A
Description
Schedule
#
[2.5]
Code
[1-00]
▪ 0: No
[1-01]
▪ 1: Yes
[1-02]
[1-03]
Heating schedule
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
[1-02]
[1-03]
You can set the main zone heating temperature schedule using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
[1-00]
Cooling schedule
You can set the main zone cooling temperature using the schedule
screen. For more information about this screen, see "8.3.8 Schedule
screen: Example" on page 51.
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
In Fixed mode, the desired leaving water temperature does NOT
depend on the outdoor ambient temperature.
In WD heating, fixed cooling mode, the desired leaving water
temperature:
▪ does NOT depend on the outdoor ambient temperature for cooling
In Weather dependent mode, the desired leaving water temperature
depends on the outdoor ambient temperature.
Code
N/A
Description
Setpoint mode
▪ 0: Fixed
ambient
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[1‑02]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
▪ 1: WD heating, fixed cooling
▪ 2: Weather dependent
When weather dependent operation is active, low outdoor
temperatures will result in warmer water and vice versa. During
weather dependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift the
water temperature up or down by a maximum of 10°C.
Heating WD curve
Set weather-dependent heating for the main zone (if [2.4] = 1 or 2):
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. –40°C~+5°C
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [1‑03] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
▪ depends on the outdoor ambient temperature for heating
[2.4]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main zone)
Setpoint mode
#
[1-01]
Cooling WD curve
Set weather-dependent cooling for the main zone (if [2.4] = 2):
Installer reference guide
54
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
[2.6]
Code
[1-06]
[1-07]
Description
NOTICE
Set weather-dependent cooling:
The maximum setpoint in space heating depends on the
emitter type as can be seen in above table. If there are 2
water temperature zones, then the maximum setpoint is
the maximum of the 2 zones.
Tt
[1-08]
[1-09]
[1-08]
CAUTION
[1-09]
[1-06]
[1-07]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main zone)
CAUTION
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
▪ [1-06]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ [1-07]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
ambient
▪ [1-08]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [1‑09] as for low outdoor
temperatures less cold water is
required.
▪ [1-09]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9-02]°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[1‑08]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures colder water is required.
Emitter type
Depending on the system water volume and the heater emitter type
of the main zone, the heat up or cool down of the main zone can
take longer. This setting can compensate for a slow or a quick
heating/cooling system during the heat up/cool down cycle. The
target delta T for the main zone will depend on this setting.
In room thermostat control, this setting will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature, and the
possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating changeover
based on the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly and in accordance with
your system layout.
#
[2.7]
Code
[2‑0C]
Description
Emitter type
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
▪ 2: Radiator
The setting of the emitter type has an influence on the space heating
setpoint range and the target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type Main
zone
Space heating
setpoint range
[9‑01]~[9‑00]
If there are 2 zones, it is important that the zone with the
lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone,
and the zone with the highest water temperature is
configured as the additional zone. Not configuring the
system in this way could cause damage to the heat
emitters.
Target delta T in
heating [1‑0B]
0: Underfloor heating Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
1: Fancoil unit
Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
2: Radiator
Maximum 65°C
Fixed 10°C
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly
configured, water of high temperature can be sent towards
a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To avoid
this:
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high
temperatures towards a low temperature emitter.
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone
[2.7] and for the additional zone [3.7] correctly in
accordance with the connected emitter.
INFORMATION
Depending on the target delta T, the average emitter
temperature will vary. To counteract the effect on the
average emitter temperature due to a higher delta T target,
the leaving water setpoint (fixed or weather dependent)
can be adjusted.
Setpoint range
You can limit the range of the leaving water temperature for the main
leaving water temperature zone. The purpose of this setting is to
prevent a wrong (i.e. too hot or too cold) leaving water temperature.
Therefore, the available desired heating temperature range and
desired cooling temperature range can be configured.
NOTICE
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling
operation to 18~20°C to prevent condensation on the
floor.
NOTICE
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
55
8 Configuration
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures MUST be sufficiently higher than the room
temperatures (in heating).
#
Code
#
[2.A]
Code
[C‑05]
▪ 1: 1 contact: The used external room
thermostat can only send a thermo
ON/OFF condition. There is no
separation between heating or cooling
demand. The room thermostat is
connected to only 1 digital input
(X2M/35).
Select this value in case of a
connection to the heat pump convector
(FWXV).
Description
▪ 2: 2 contacts: The used external room
thermostat can send a separate
heating/cooling
thermo
ON/OFF
condition. The room thermostat is
connected to 2 digital inputs (X2M/35
and X2M/34).
Select this value in case of a
connection to the wired (EKRTWA) or
wireless (EKRTR1) room thermostat
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
highest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
[2.8.1]
[9-01]
Heating minimum 15°C~37°C
[2.8.2]
[9-00]
Heating maximum
▪ [2‑0C]=2 (emitter type main zone =
radiator)
37°C~65°C
▪ Otherwise: 37°C~55°C
[2.8.3]
[9-02]
Cooling minimum 5°C~18°C
[2.8.4]
[9-03]
Cooling maximum 18°C~22°C
Control
For the control of the unit there are 3 possibilities:
Control
In this control...
Leaving water
Unit operation is decided based on the leaving
water temperature regardless the actual room
temperature and/or heating or cooling demand
of the room.
External room
thermostat
Unit operation is decided by the external
thermostat or equivalent (e.g. heat pump
convector).
Room thermostat
Unit operation is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface used as a
room thermostat.
#
[2.9]
Code
[C‑07]
Description
▪ 0: Leaving water
Description
External room thermostat type for the
main zone:
Leaving water temperature: Delta T
The target delta T in heating for the main zone depends on the
emitter type for the main zone selected above. In heating, this
setting indicates the temperature difference between the leaving
water setpoint and entering water. In cooling, this setting indicates
the temperature difference between entering and leaving water
temperature.
The unit is designed to support under floor loops operation. The
recommended leaving water temperature for under floor loops is
35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the unit entering
water temperature is around 30°C. Depending on the installed
application (radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or
situation, it can be possible to change the difference between
entering and leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will
regulate its flow to keep the delta T. In some special cases, the
measured delta T can be different from the set value.
INFORMATION
When only the backup heater is active in heating, delta T
will be controlled according to the fixed capacity of the
backup heater. It is possible that this delta T is different
from the selected target delta T.
▪ 1: External room thermostat
▪ 2: Room thermostat
Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control.
INFORMATION
In heating, the target delta T will only be achieved after
some operation time, when the setpoint is being reached,
because of the big difference between leaving water
temperature setpoint and inlet temperature at startup.
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
INFORMATION
If the main zone or the additional zone has a heating
demand, and this zone is equipped with radiators, then the
target delta T that the unit will use in heating operation will
be 10°C fixed.
If the zones are not equipped with radiators, then in
heating the unit will give priority to the target delta T for the
additional zone, if there is a heating demand in the
additional zone.
In cooling the unit will give priority to the target delta T for
the additional zone, if there is a cooling demand in the
additional zone.
Installer reference guide
56
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
[2.B.1]
Code
[1‑0B]
Description
INFORMATION
Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in heating
mode.
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
▪ If [2-0C]=2, this is fixed to 10°C
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
[2.B.2]
[1‑0D]
Delta T cooling: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in cooling
mode.
▪ 3°C~10°C
Tt
+[8-06]
−[8-06]
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures exactly
temperature (higher comfort level)
matching
the
desired
a
b
Ta
a
b
Shut off valve
The following is only applicable in case of 2 leaving water
temperature zones. In case of 1 leaving water temperature zone,
connect the shut-off valve to the heating/cooling output.
The shut off valve for the main leaving water temperature zone can
close under these circumstances:
INFORMATION
▪ less on/off cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
#
[2.C.1]
Code
[8‑05]
Description
Modulation:
▪ 0 No: Disabled, the desired leaving
water temperature needs to be set on
the user interface.
▪ 1 Yes: Enabled, the leaving water
temperature is calculated according to
the difference between the desired
and the actual room temperature. This
creates a better match between the
capacity of the heat pump and the
actual required capacity, and results in
less start/stop cycles and a more
economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface.
[2.C.2]
[8‑06]
During defrost operation, the shut-off valve is ALWAYS
opened.
During thermo: If [F‑0B] is enabled, the shut off valve closes when
there is no heating demand from the main zone. Enable this setting
to:
▪ avoid leaving water supply to the heat emitters in the main LWT
zone (through the mixing valve station) when there is request from
the additional LWT zone.
▪ activate the ON/OFF pump of the mixing valve station ONLY when
there is demand.
#
[2.D.1]
Code
[F-0B]
Description
The shut off valve:
▪ 0 No: is NOT influenced by heating or
cooling demand.
▪ 1 Yes: closes when there is NO
heating or cooling demand.
INFORMATION
The setting [F‑0B] is only valid when there is a thermostat
or external room thermostat request setting (NOT in case
of leaving water temperature setting).
Max modulation:
▪ 0°C~10°C
This is the temperature value by which
the desired leaving water temperature is
increased or decreased.
Weather-dependent curve
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
During cooling: If [F‑0B] is enabled, the shut off valve closes when
the unit is running in cooling operation mode. Enable this setting to
avoid cold leaving water through the heat emitter and the forming of
condensation (e.g. under floor heating loops or radiators).
#
[2.D.2]
Code
[F-0C]
Description
The shut off valve:
▪ 0 No: is NOT influenced by changing
the space operation mode to cooling.
▪ 1 Yes: closes when the
operation mode is cooling.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
space
Installer reference guide
57
8 Configuration
8.4.4
Additional zone
#
[3.5]
Setpoint screen
You can set the leaving water temperature for the additional zone
using the setpoint screen. For more information about how to do this,
see "8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 50.
Code
[0-00]
[0-01]
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
[0-02]
[0-03]
Schedule
[0-01]
[0-00]
Indicates if the desired leaving water temperature is according to a
schedule. Also see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 53.
#
[3.1]
Code
N/A
[0-03]
Description
Schedule
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional zone)
▪ 1: Yes
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
You can set the additional zone heating temperature schedule using
the schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
You can set the additional zone cooling temperature using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
Setpoint mode
The setpoint mode of the additional zone can be independently set
from the setpoint mode of the main zone, see " Main zone" on
page 54.
Code
N/A
Setpoint mode
▪ 0: Fixed
▪ 1: WD heating, fixed cooling
▪ 2: Weather dependent
Heating WD curve
Installer reference guide
58
ambient
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]~min(45, [9‑06])°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[0‑01]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
Description
Set weather-dependent heating for the additional zone (if [3.4] = 1 or
2):
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. –40°C~+5°C
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑00] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
Cooling schedule
[3.4]
Ta
▪ 0: No
Heating schedule
#
[0-02]
Cooling WD curve
Set weather-dependent cooling for the main zone (if [3.4] = 2):
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
[3.6]
Code
[0-04]
[0-05]
Description
#
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Code
[3.8.2]
[9-06]
Tt
▪ [2‑0D]=2 (emitter type additional zone
= radiator)
37°C~65°C
[0-06]
[0-07]
[0-05]
▪ Else: 37°C~55°C
[0-04]
[0-07]
[0-06]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional zone)
[3.8.3]
[9-07]
Cooling minimum: 5°C~18°C
[3.8.4]
[9-08]
Cooling maximum: 8°C~22°C
Control
The control type is displayed here, but cannot be adjusted. It is
determined by the control type of the main zone. For more info about
the functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 53.
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
#
▪ [0-07]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ [0-06]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
ambient
▪ [0-05]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑04] as for low outdoor
temperatures less cold water is
required.
▪ [0-04]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[0‑05]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures colder water is required.
Code
[3.9]
N/A
For more info about this functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on
page 53.
#
▪ Leaving water if the control type of the
main zone is Leaving water.
▪ External room thermostat if the control
type of the main zone is External room
thermostat or Room thermostat.
Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control. For more info
about the functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 53.
#
Code
[3.A]
[C‑06]
▪ 1: 1 contact. Connected to only 1
digital input (X2M/35a)
▪ 2: 2 contacts. Connected to 2 digital
inputs (X2M/34a and X2M/35a)
Leaving water temperature: Delta T
#
Code
[3.B.1]
[1-0C]
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
▪ If [2-0C] = 2, this is fixed to 10°C
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
[3.B.2]
▪ 2: Radiator
[1-0E]
The setting of the emitter type has an influence on the space heating
setpoint range and the target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type
Additional zone
Space heating
setpoint range
[9‑05]~[9‑06]
8.4.5
Variable (see [2.B])
1: Fancoil unit
Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
2: Radiator
Maximum 65°C
Fixed 10°C
Setpoint range
For more information about this setting, also see "8.4.3 Main
zone" on page 53.
[9-05]
Space heating/cooling
About space operation modes
Depending on your heat pump model, you have to tell the system
which space operation mode to use: heating or cooling.
If a … heat pump
model is installed
Heating minimum: 15°C~37°C
Then…
Heating/cooling
The system can heat up and cool down a
space. You have to tell the system which
space operation mode to use.
Heating only
The system can heat up a space, but
NOT cool down a space. You do NOT
have to tell the system which space
operation mode to use.
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
lowest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
Delta T cooling: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in cooling
mode.
▪ 3°C~10°C
Target delta T in
heating [1‑0C]
0: Underfloor heating Maximum 55°C
Code
Description
Emitter type
Description
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
[3.8.1]
Description
External room thermostat type for the
additional zone:
Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in heating
mode.
Code
[2‑0D]
#
Description
Control
For more information, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 53.
Emitter type
[3.7]
Description
Heating maximum
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
59
8 Configuration
To determine if a heating/cooling heat pump model is installed
1 Go to [4]: Space heating/cooling.
2 Check if [4.1] Operation mode is listed and editable.
If so, a heating/cooling heat pump model is installed.
To tell the system which space operation to use, you can:
You can…
Location
Check which space operation mode is
currently used.
Home screen
If both the Operation mode and the Operation mode schedule are
set to Automatic, the operation mode will be determined by the
outdoor temperature. The operation mode will be changed in order
to ALWAYS be within the operation range determined by the Space
heating off temperature and the Space cooling off temperature. If the
outdoor temperature drops, the operation mode will switch to cooling
and vice versa. The outdoor temperature is time-averaged.
If the outdoor temperature is between the Space heating off
temperature and the Space cooling off temperature, the operation
mode remains unchanged.
Set the space operation mode permanently. Main menu
Operation range
Restrict automatic changeover according
to a monthly schedule.
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating or space cooling is prohibited.
To check which space operation mode is currently used
The space operation mode is displayed on the home screen:
▪ When the unit is in heating mode, the
icon is shown.
▪ When the unit is in cooling mode, the
icon is shown.
#
Code
[4.3.1]
[4-02]
[4.3.2]
[F-01]
The status indicator shows if the unit is currently in operation:
▪ When the unit is not in operation, the status indicator will show a
blue pulsation with an interval of approximately 5 seconds.
Description
Space heating off temperature: When the
averaged outdoor temperature rises
above this value, space heating is turned
off. This setting is also used in automatic
heating/cooling changeover.
▪ 14°C~35°C
▪ While the unit is in operation, the status indicator will light up blue
constantly.
To set the space operation mode
Space cooling off temperature: When the
averaged outdoor temperature drops
below this value, space cooling is turned
off. This setting is also used in automatic
heating/cooling changeover.
▪ 10°C~35°C
1 Go to [4.1]: Space heating/cooling > Operation mode
Exception: If the system is configured in room thermostat control
with one leaving water temperature zone and quick heat emitters,
the operation mode will change based on:
2 Select one of the following options:
▪ Heating: Always heating mode
▪ Cooling: Always cooling mode
▪ Automatic: The operation mode changes
automatically based on the outdoor temperature.
Restricted according to the operation mode
schedule.
Automatic heating/cooling changeover is only applicable for EHBX
and EHVX.
When Automatic is selected, the changing of the operation mode is
based on the Operation mode schedule [4.2]: the end user indicates
on a monthly base which operation is allowed.
To restrict automatic changeover according to a schedule
Conditions: You set the space operation mode to Automatic.
1 Go to [4.2]: Space heating/cooling > Operation mode
schedule.
2 Select a month.
▪ The measured indoor temperature: Besides the heating and the
cooling desired room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis
value (e.g. when in heating, this value is related to the desired
cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when in heating,
this value is related to the desired heating temperature).
Example: The desired room temperature in heating mode is 22°C
and in cooling mode it is 24°C, with a hysteresis value of 1°C and
an offset of 4°C. Changeover from heating to cooling will occur
when the room temperature rises above the maximum of the
desired cooling temperature added by the hysteresis value (thus
25°C) and the desired heating temperature added by the offset
value (26°C). Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will
occur when the room temperature drops below the minimum of
the desired heating temperature subtracted by the hysteresis
value (thus 21°C) and the desired cooling temperature subtracted
by the offset value (thus 20°C)
Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to
cooling and vice versa.
3 For each month, select an option:
#
Code
Description
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature. ONLY
applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured
in room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone
and quick heat emitters.
▪ Reversible: Not restricted
▪ Heating only: Restricted
▪ Cooling only: Restricted
4 Confirm the changes.
N/A
Example: Changeover restrictions
When
Restriction
During cold season.
Heating only
Example: October, November,
December, January, February and March.
During warm season.
[4-0B]
Hysteresis: Ensures that changeover is
ONLY done when necessary. The space
operation ONLY changes from heating to
cooling when the room temperature rises
above the desired cooling temperature
added by the hysteresis value.
▪ Range: 1°C~10°C
Cooling only
Example: June, July and August.
In-between.
Reversible
Example: April, May and September.
Installer reference guide
60
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[4-0D]
Description
CAUTION
Offset: Ensures that the active desired
room temperature is always reached. In
heating mode, the space operation
ONLY changes when the room
temperature rises above the desired
heating temperature added by the offset
value.
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly
configured, water of high temperature can be sent towards
a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To avoid
this:
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high
temperatures towards a low temperature emitter.
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone
[2.7] and for the additional zone [3.7] correctly in
accordance with the connected emitter.
▪ Range: 1°C~10°C
Number of zones
The system can supply leaving water to up to 2 water temperature
zones. During configuration, the number of water zones must be set.
#
[4.4]
Code
[7‑02]
Description
▪ 0: Single zone
Only one leaving water temperature
zone:
Pump operation mode
When the space heating/cooling operation is OFF, the pump is
always OFF. When space heating/cooling operation is ON, you have
the choice between these operation modes:
#
[4.5]
Code
[F–0D]
Description
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 Continuous: Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: Continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b
c
a
b
▪ a: Main LWT zone
[4.4]
[7‑02]
▪ 1: Dual zone
Two leaving water temperature zones.
The main leaving water temperature
zone consists of the higher load heat
emitters and a mixing station to
achieve the desired leaving water
temperature. In heating:
a
b
▪ a: Additional LWT zone: Highest
temperature
▪ b: Main LWT
temperature
zone:
Lowest
c
d
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
▪ b: Off
▪ c: On
▪ d: Pump operation
[4.5]
[F-0D]
▪ 1 Sample: The pump is ON when
there is heating or cooling demand as
the leaving water temperature has not
yet reached the desired temperature
yet. When thermo OFF condition
occurs, the pump runs every 3 minutes
to check the water temperature and
demand heating or cooling if
necessary. Remark: Sample is ONLY
available in leaving water temperature
control.
a
c
b
e
d
g
b
f
c
CAUTION
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
If there are 2 zones, it is important that the zone with the
lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone,
and the zone with the highest water temperature is
configured as the additional zone. Not configuring the
system in this way could cause damage to the heat
emitters.
▪ b: Off
▪ c: On
▪ d: LWT temperature
▪ e: Actual
▪ f: Desired
▪ g: Pump operation
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
61
8 Configuration
#
[4.5]
Code
[F-0D]
Description
[9-0D]=0
[9-0D]=5
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
▪ 2 Request: Pump operation based on
request. Example:
Using a room
thermostat and thermostat creates
thermo ON/OFF condition. Remark:
NOT available in leaving water
temperature control.
a
b
c
d
e
b
c
b
c
b (l/min)
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=6
[9-0D]=7
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
▪ b: Off
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by external
room
thermostat
or
room
thermostat)
▪ e: Pump operation
Unit type
In this part of the menu it can be read out which type of unit is used:
#
[4.6]
Code
N/A
Description
Unit type:
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=8
▪ 1 Cooling only
a (kPa)
▪ 2 Heating only
▪ 3 Reversible
Pump limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
#
[4.7]
Code
[9-0D]
Description
b (l/min)
Pump limitation:
a
b
▪ 0: No limitation
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 5~8: Limitation when no actuators.
When there is no heating output, the
pump speed limitation is applicable.
When there is heating output, the
pump speed is only determined by
delta T in relation to the required
capacity. With this limitation range,
delta T is possible and the comfort is
guaranteed.
External static pressure
Water flow rate
Pump outside range
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by the Space
heating off temperature [4‑02] or if the outdoor temperature drops
below the value set by the Space cooling off temperature [F‑01].
When the pump operation is enabled, the pump operation is possible
at all outdoor temperatures.
#
[4.9]
Code
[F-00]
Description
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01]
depending
on
heating/cooling
operation mode.
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
▪ 1:
Possible
temperatures.
at
all
outdoor
Increase around 0°C
Use this setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the
building due to the evaporation of melted ice or snow. (e.g. in cold
region countries).
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased around an outdoor temperature of 0°C.This compensation
can be selected when using an absolute or a weather dependent
desired temperature (see illustration below).
Installer reference guide
62
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Tt
Tt
INFORMATION
R
R
0°C
TA
0°C
a
[4.A]
TA
b
a
b
#
When powerful operation is active, the risk of space
heating/cooling and capacity shortage comfort problems is
significant. In case of frequent domestic hot water
operation, frequent and long space heating/cooling
interruptions will happen.
L
L
Absolute desired LWT
Weather dependent desired LWT
Code
[D-03]
Comfort setpoint
Description
Increase around 0°C
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
▪ 2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
▪ 3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
▪ 4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
Overshoot
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will start up again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
[4.B]
Code
[9-04]
Description
Overshoot
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is Schedule
only or Schedule + reheat. When programming the schedule, you
can make use of the comfort setpoint as a preset value. When you
later want to change the storage setpoint, you only have to do it in
one place.
The tank will heat up until the storage comfort temperature has
been reached. It is the higher desired temperature when a storage
comfort action is scheduled.
Additionally, a storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a
stop to tank heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached.
Only program a storage stop when tank heating is absolutely
undesirable.
#
[5.2]
Description
Comfort setpoint
▪ 30°C~[6‑0E]°C
Eco setpoint
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired
tank temperature. It is the desired temperature when a storage
economic action is scheduled (preferably during day).
▪ 1°C~4°C
Antifrost
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold.
For more information about room frost protection, see
"8.4.2 Room" on page 52.
8.4.6
Code
[6-0A]
#
[5.3]
Code
[6-0B]
Description
Eco setpoint
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E])°C
Reheat setpoint
Tank
Desired reheat tank temperature, used:
Tank setpoint screen
You can set the domestic hot water temperature using the setpoint
screen. For more information about how to do this, see
"8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 50.
Powerful operation
You can use powerful operation to immediately start heating up the
water to the preset value (Storage comfort). However, this consumes
extra energy. If powerful operation is active,
the home screen.
will be shown on
To activate powerful operation
▪ in Schedule + reheat mode, during reheat mode: the guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by the Reheat setpoint minus the
reheat hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value,
the tank is heated up.
▪ during storage comfort, to prioritize the domestic hot water
preparation. When the tank temperature rises above this value,
domestic hot water preparation and space heating/cooling are
executed sequentially.
#
[5.4]
Code
[6-0C]
Activate or deactivate Powerful operation as follows:
Description
Reheat setpoint
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E]°C
1 Go to [5.1]: Tank > Powerful operation
Schedule
2 Turn powerful operation Off or On.
You can set the tank temperature schedule using the schedule
screen. For more information about this screen, see "8.3.8 Schedule
screen: Example" on page 51.
Usage example: You immediately need more hot water
If you are in the following situation:
▪ You already consumed most of your hot water.
▪ You cannot wait for the next scheduled action to heat up the DHW
tank.
Heat up mode
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
Then you can activate DHW powerful operation.
Advantage: The DHW tank immediately starts heating up the water
to the preset value (Storage comfort).
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
63
8 Configuration
#
Code
[5.6]
[6-0D]
Description
WARNING
Heat up mode
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
▪ 0: Reheat only: Only reheat operation
is allowed.
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
▪ 1: Schedule + reheat: The domestic
hot water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heat up cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
▪ 2: Schedule only: The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
CAUTION
See the operation manual for more details.
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [5.7.3] with
defined duration [5.7.5] is NOT interrupted by possible
domestic hot water demand.
Disinfection
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
#
Code
[5.7.1]
[2‑01]
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
Description
Activation
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
[5.7.2]
[2‑00]
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
Operation day
▪ 0: Every day
▪ 1: Monday
▪ 2: Tuesday
INFORMATION
▪ 3: Wednesday
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
▪ 4: Thursday
▪ 5: Friday
INFORMATION
▪ 6: Saturday
An AH error occurs if you turn off domestic hot water
operation during disinfection.
▪ 7: Sunday
[5.7.3]
[2‑02]
Start time
[5.7.4]
[2‑03]
Tank setpoint
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
60°C
[5.7.5]
[2‑04]
Duration
40~60 minutes
INFORMATION
TDHW
[2-03]
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
[2-04]
INFORMATION
TH
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
TU
#
[5.8]
00.00
01.00
22.00
23.00
24.00
[6-0E]
Description
Maximum
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
t
[2-02]
TDHW
TU
TH
t
Code
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature
High set point temperature [2-03]
Time
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
Hysteresis
The following ON hysteresis can be set.
Installer reference guide
64
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Heat pump ON hysteresis
#
Applicable when domestic hot water preparation is reheat only.
When the tank temperature drops below the reheat temperature
minus the heat pump ON hysteresis temperature, the tank heats up
to the reheat temperature.
Code
[5.C]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
[5.9]
Code
[6-00]
[0-0B]
Description
Heat pump ON hysteresis
[0-0E]
▪ 2°C~40°C
Code
[6-08]
Description
Reheat hysteresis
▪ 2°C~20°C
#
Code
N/A
Description
Setpoint mode:
ambient
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
temperature: 10°C‑25°C
ambient
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises above the high ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C
▪ Fixed
▪ Weather dependent
WD curve
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
temperature: -40°C‑5°C
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops below the low ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C
Setpoint mode
[5.B]
Ta
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
Applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
+reheat. When the tank temperature drops below the reheat
temperature minus the reheat hysteresis temperature, the tank heats
up to the reheat temperature.
#
[0-0D]
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
Reheat hysteresis
[5.A]
TDHW
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
The minimum ON temperature is 20°C, even if setpoint hysteresis is
smaller than 20°C.
#
Description
Weather-dependent curve
Margin
When weather dependent operation is active the desired tank
temperature is determined automatically depending on the averaged
outdoor temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher
desired tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice
versa.
In case of Schedule only or Schedule + reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent.
In case of Reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired
tank temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the enduser cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface. Also see "8.3.7 Detailed screen with weather-dependent
curve" on page 50.
In domestic hot water operation, the following hysteresis value can
be set for the heat pump operation:
#
Code
[5.D]
[6-01]
Description
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
Range: 0°C~10°C
Example: setpoint (TU)>maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
TDHW
TU=TBUH OFF 60
THP MAX 50
THP OFF 48
[6-01]
[6-00]
THP ON 46
40
30
20
10
HP
BUH
TU
= 60°C
THP MAX = 50°C
[6-01] = 2°C
[6-00] = 2°C
HP
5
BUH
HP
TBUH OFF
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
t
Backup heater
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the backup heater can take place
Backup heater OFF temperature (TU)
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
Example: setpoint (TU)≤maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
65
8 Configuration
TDHW
2 Set the first day of your holiday.
THP MAX 50
TU=THP OFF 45
THP ON 43
—
▪ Go to [7.3.2]: From.
[6-00]
▪ Select a date.
40
▪ Confirm the changes.
30
3 Set the last day of your holiday.
—
▪ Go to [7.3.3]: Till.
20
HP
10
▪ Select a date.
5
▪ Confirm the changes.
t
HP
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the backup heater can take place
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
INFORMATION
Quiet
About quiet mode
You can use quiet mode to decrease the sound of the outdoor unit.
However, this also decreases the heating/cooling capacity of the
system. There are multiple quiet mode levels.
You can:
▪ Completely deactivate quiet mode
The maximum heat pump temperature depends on the
ambient temperature. For more information, see the
operation range.
▪ Manually activate a quiet mode level until the next scheduled
action
▪ Use and program a quiet mode schedule
8.4.7
User settings
To check if quiet mode is active
If
Language
#
Code
[7.1]
N/A
is displayed on the home screen, quiet mode is active.
To use quiet mode
Description
1 Go to [7.4.1]: User settings > Quiet > Activation.
Language
2 Do one of the following:
Time/date
If you want to…
#
Code
[7.2]
N/A
Description
Completely deactivate
quiet mode
Set the local time and date
INFORMATION
By default, daylight savings time is enabled and clock
format is set to 24 hours. If you want to change these
settings, you can do this in the menu structure (User
settings > Time/date) once the unit is initialised.
Holiday
About holiday mode
During your holiday, you can use the holiday mode to deviate from
your normal schedules without having to change them. While holiday
mode is active, space heating/cooling operation and domestic hot
water operation will be turned off. Room frost protection and antilegionella operation will remain active.
—
Then…
Select Off.
Manually activate a quiet Select the applicable quiet
mode level
mode level. Example: Most
quiet.
Use and program a quiet Select Automatic.
mode schedule
Go to [7.4.2] Schedule and
program the schedule. For
more information about
scheduling, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen:
Example" on page 51.
Usage example: Baby is sleeping in the afternoon
If you are in the following situation:
▪ You have programmed a quiet mode schedule:
Typical workflow
▪ During the night: Most quiet.
Using holiday mode typically consists of the following stages:
1
Setting the starting date and ending date of your holiday.
2
Activating the holiday mode.
▪ During the day: Off to ensure the heating/cooling capacity of the
system.
▪ However, during the afternoon the baby is sleeping and you want
it to be quiet.
To check if holiday mode is activated and/or running
Then you can do the following:
is activated on the home screen, holiday mode is active.
If
1 Go to [7.4.1]: User settings > Quiet > Activation.
To configure the holiday
2 Select Most quiet.
1 Activate the holiday mode.
—
▪ Go to [7.3.1]: User settings > Holiday > Activation.
Advantage:
The outdoor unit runs in its most quiet level.
▪ Select On.
Installer reference guide
66
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Electricity prices and gas price
To set the gas price in case of an incentive per kWh renewable
energy
Only applicable in combination with the bivalent function. See also
"Bivalent" on page 72.
Calculate the value for the gas price with the following formula:
#
Code
▪ Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
Description
[7.5.1]
N/A
Electricity price > High
[7.5.2]
N/A
Electricity price > Medium
[7.5.3]
N/A
Electricity price > Low
[7.6]
N/A
Gas price
For the procedure to set the gas price, see "To set the gas price" on
page 67.
To set the electricity price in case of an incentive per kWh
renewable energy
Calculate the value for the electricity price with following formula:
INFORMATION
▪ Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([9.C.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in menu
structure [7.5.1], [7.5.2] and [7.5.3]. Do NOT use overview
settings.
For the procedure to set the electricity price, see "To set the
electricity price" on page 67.
Example
This is an example and the prices and/or values used in this
example are NOT accurate.
To set the gas price
1 Go to [7.6]: User settings > Gas price.
2 Select the correct gas price.
3 Confirm the changes.
INFORMATION
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2
significant values).
Data
Price/kWh
Gas price
4.08
Electricity price
12.49
Renewable heat incentive per
kWh
5
Calculation of the gas price:
Gas price=Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
To set the electricity price
Gas price=4.08+(5×0.9)
1 Go to [7.5.1]/[7.5.2]/[7.5.3]: User settings > Electricity
price > High/Medium/Low.
Gas price=8.58
2 Select the correct electricity price.
Calculation of the electricity price:
3 Confirm the changes.
Electricity price=Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh
4 Repeat this for all three electricity prices.
—
Electricity price=12.49+5
INFORMATION
Electricity price=17.49
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2
significant values).
Price
Value in breadcrumb
Gas: 4.08 /kWh
[7.6]=8.6
INFORMATION
Electricity: 12.49 /kWh
[7.5.1]=17
If no schedule is set, the Electricity price for High is taken
into account.
8.4.8
Dealer information
To set the electricity price schedule timer
The installer can fill in his contact number here.
1 Go to [7.5.4]: User settings > Electricity price >
Schedule.
2 Program the selection using the scheduling screen.
You can set the High, Medium and Low electricity
prices according to your electricity supplier.
Information
#
—
Code
[8.3]
N/A
Description
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
Possible read-out information
3 Confirm the changes.
In menu…
INFORMATION
The values correspond with the electricity price values for
High, Medium and Low previously set. If no schedule is
set, the electricity price for High is taken into account.
You can read out…
[8.1] Energy data
Produced energy, consumed
electricity, and consumed gas
[8.2] Malfunction history
Malfunction history
[8.3] Dealer information
Contact/helpdesk number
About energy prices in case of an incentive per kWh renewable
energy
[8.4] Sensors
An incentive can be taken into account when setting the energy
prices. Although the running cost can increase, the total operation
cost, taking into account the reimbursement will be optimized.
Room, tank or domestic hot
water, outside, and leaving water
temperature (if applicable)
[8.5] Actuators
Status/mode of each actuator
Example: Domestic hot water
pump ON/OFF
NOTICE
Make sure to modify the setting of the energy prices at the
end of the incentive period.
[8.6] Operation modes
Current operation mode
Example: Defrost/oil return
mode
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
67
8 Configuration
In menu…
DHW pump schedule
You can read out…
[8.7] About
Version information about the
system
Here you can program a schedule for the DHW pump (only for field
supplied domestic hot water pump for secondary return).
[8.8] Connection status
Information about the connection
status of the unit, the room
thermostat and the LAN adapter.
Program a domestic hot water pump schedule to determine when
to turn on and off the pump.
8.4.9
Installer settings
When turned on, the pump runs and makes sure hot water is
instantly available at the tap. To save energy, only turn on the pump
during periods of the day when instant hot water is necessary.
Configuration wizard
Backup heater
After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you
using the configuration wizard. This way you can set the most
important initial settings. This way the unit will be able to run
properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be done via the
menu structure if required.
Besides the type of backup heater, the voltage, configuration and
capacity must be set on the user interface.
To restart the configuration wizard, go to Installer settings >
Configuration wizard [9.1].
Backup heater type
Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water
The following setting determines if the system can prepare domestic
hot water or not, and which tank is used. This setting is read only.
#
Code
[9.2.1]
[E‑05]
(*)
[E‑06](*)
[E‑07]
(*)
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
The capacities for the different steps of the backup heater must be
set for the energy metering and/or power consumption feature to
work properly. When measuring the resistance value of each heater,
you can set the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more
accurate energy data.
The backup heater is adapted to be connected to most common
European electricity grids. The type of backup heater must be set on
the user interface. For units with a built-in backup heater, the type of
heater can be viewed but not changed.
#
Description
▪ Integrated
The backup heater will also be used
for domestic hot water heating.
Code
[9.3.1]
[E‑03]
▪ 3: 6V
▪ 4: 9W
(*)
Menu structure setting [9.2.1] replaces the following 3
overview settings:
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
Is a domestic hot water tank installed in the system?
What kind of domestic hot water tank is installed?
Voltage
▪ For a 3V model, this is fixed to 230V, 1ph.
▪ For a 6V model, this can be set to:
▪ 230V, 1ph
DHW pump
#
Code
[9.2.2]
[D‑02]
▪ 230V, 3ph
Description
▪ For a 9W model, this is fixed to 400V, 3ph.
DHW pump:
#
▪ 0: No DHW pump: NOT installed
▪ 1: Instant hot water: Installed for
instant hot water when water is
tapped. The user sets the operation
timing of the domestic hot water pump
using the schedule. Control of this
pump is possible with the user
interface.
▪ 2:
Disinfection
:
Installed
for
disinfection. It runs when the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
Code
[9.3.2]
[5‑0D]
Configuration
The backup heater can be configured in different ways. It can be
chosen to have a 1-step only backup heater or a backup heater with
2 steps. If 2 steps, the capacity of the second step depends on this
setting. It can also be chosen to have a higher capacity of the
second step in emergency.
#
Code
[4‑0A]
a
a
f
b
b
g
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Indoor unit
Tank
Domestic hot water pump
Heater element
Non‑return valve
Shower
Cold water
Installer reference guide
Description
▪ 0: Relay 1
▪ 1: Relay 1 / Relay 1+2(a)
▪ 2: Relay 1 / Relay 2(a)
Disinfection
c
▪ 0: 230V, 1ph
▪ 2: 400V, 3ph
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
Instant hot water
Description
▪ 1: 230V, 3ph
[9.3.3]
See also illustrations below.
68
Description
▪ 2: 3V
▪ 3: Relay 1 / Relay 2 Emergency Relay
1+2(a)
c
d
f
e
g
(a)
Not available for 3V models.
INFORMATION
Settings [9.3.3] and [9.3.5] are linked. Changing one
setting influences the other. If you change one, check if the
other is still as expected.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
During normal operation, the capacity of the second step of
the backup heater at nominal voltage is equal to
[6‑03]+[6‑04].
INFORMATION
If [4‑0A]=3 and emergency mode is active, the power
usage of the backup heater is maximal and equal to
2×[6‑03]+[6‑04].
▪ When auto emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure
occurs, the domestic hot water and space heating operation will
stop and need to be recovered manually via the user interface. To
recover operation manually, go to the Malfunctioning main menu
screen, where the user interface will then ask you to confirm
whether the backup heater can take over the heat load or not.
Emergency
We recommend to set Emergency to Automatic if the house is
unattended for longer periods.
#
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
the storage temperature set point is higher than 50°C,
Daikin recommends NOT to disable the backup heater
second step because it will have a big impact on the
required time for the unit to heat up the domestic hot water
tank.
[6‑03]
INFORMATION
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
Description
If a heat pump failure occurs and Emergency is set to
Manual, the room frost protection function, the underfloor
heating screed dryout function, and the water pipe
antifreeze function will remain active even if the user does
NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ The capacity of the first step of the
backup heater at nominal voltage.
Additional capacity step 2
#
Code
[9.3.5]
[6‑04]
Description
▪ The capacity difference between the
second and first step of the backup
heater at nominal voltage. Nominal
value depends on backup heater
configuration.
Balancing
Priorities
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank
#
[9.6.1]
Equilibrium
#
Code
[9.3.6]
[5-00]
Code
[5‑02]
Description
Equilibrium: Is backup heater operation
allowed above equilibrium temperature
during space heating operation?
This setting MUST always be 1.
▪ 0: Allowed
[5-01]
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
Equilibrium temperature: Outdoor
temperature below which operation of
the backup heater is allowed.
Range: ‑15°C~35°C
If the backup heater operation is limited
([4‑00]=0) and the outdoor temperature
is lower than setting [5‑03], the
domestic hot water will not be heated
with the backup heater.
Operation
#
[9.3.8]
Code
[4‑00]
Description
Backup heater operation:
▪ 0: Restricted
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ 2: Only DHW Enabled for domestic hot
water, disable for space heating
Description
Space heating priority: Defines whether
backup heater will assist the heat pump
during domestic hot water operation.
Enable this function to shorten tank
heating operation time and interruption
of the space heating cycle.
▪ 1: NOT allowed
[9.3.7]
Description
▪ 0: Manual
INFORMATION
Code
[9.3.4]
N/A
▪ 1: Automatic
Capacity step 1
#
Code
[9.5]
[9.6.2]
[5‑03]
Priority temperature: Defines the
outdoor temperature which below the
backup heater will assist during
domestic hot water heating.
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
backup heater operation during space heating needs to be
limited but can be allowed for domestic hot water
operation, then set [4‑00] to 2.
Emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate, the backup heater can serve
as an emergency heater and either automatically or nonautomatically take over the heat load.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure
occurs, the backup heater will automatically take over the heat
load and the domestic hot water production.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
69
8 Configuration
#
[9.6.3]
Description
1
Offset BSH setpoint: Set point
correction for domestic hot water
temperature: set point correction for the
desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
2
t
Code
[5-04]
[8-04]: Additional timer at [4-02]/[F-01]
t
t
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-02]
[8-02]
[8-01]
[8-01]
0
#
[9.6.4]
Code
[8-02]
Description
Anti-recycle timer: Minimum time
between two cycles for domestic hot
water. The actual anti-recycling time also
depends on setting [8-04].
[5-03]
TA
t
Range: 0°C~20°C
Timers for simultaneous space and domestic hot water
operation request
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
[4-02]
[8-01]
35°C
TA
Only relevant for installations with water piping outdoors. This
function tries to protect outdoor water piping from freezing.
#
[9.7]
Code
[4-04]
Description
Water pipe freeze prevention:
▪ 0: Intermittent
Minimum running timer:
Do NOT change.
[9.6.6]
[F-01]
Water pipe freeze prevention
▪ 1: Continuous
Remark: The minimum time is 0.5 hours
even when the selected value is 0.
N/A
0
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
Time
Anti-recycle timer
Maximum running time domestic hot water
Range: 0~10 hours
[9.6.5]
TA
Maximum running timer for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
▪ 2: Off
Benefit kWh power supply
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
▪ When Control=Room thermostat: This
preset value is only taken into account
if there is a request for space heating
or cooling. If there is NO request for
space heating/cooling, the tank is
heated until the setpoint has been
reached.
▪ When Control≠Room thermostat: This
preset value is always taken into
account.
Range: 5~95 minutes
[9.6.7]
[8-04]
Additional timer: Additional running time
for the maximum running time depending
on the outdoor temperature [4-02] or
[F-01].
Range: 0~95 minutes
[8-02]: Anti-recycle timer
1
0
1
0
[8-01]
Installer reference guide
70
[8-02]
t
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
[9.8.1]
Code
[D-01]
Description
Connection to a Benefit kWh power
supply or a Safety thermostat
#
[9.9.1]
Code
[4-08]
▪ 0 No: Disabled.
▪ 0 No: The outdoor unit is connected to
a normal power supply.
▪ 1 Open: The outdoor unit is connected
to a preferential kWh rate power
supply. When the preferential kWh
rate signal is sent by the electricity
company, the contact will open and
the unit will go in forced off mode.
When the signal is released again, the
voltage-free contact will close and the
unit will restart operation. Therefore,
always enable the auto restart
function.
[9.8.2]
[D-00]
▪ 1 Continuous: Enabled: You can set
one power limitation value (in A or
kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
▪ 2 Inputs: Enabled: You can set up to
four different power limitation values
(in A or kW) to which the system
power consumption will be limited
when the corresponding digital input
asks.
[9.9.2]
Type:
▪ 0 Amp: The limitation values are set
in A.
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=Amp:
▪ 3 Safety thermostat: A safety
thermostat is connected to the system
(normal closed contact)
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=Amp:
Allow heater: Which heaters are allowed
to operate during preferential kWh rate
power supply?
▪ 1 Only BSH: Booster heater only
▪ 2 Only BUH: Backup heater only
▪ 1 kW: The limitation values are set in
kW.
#
[9.9.3]
#
Allow pump:
▪ 0 No: Pump is forced off
▪ 1 Yes: No limitation
Code
Description
[5-05]
Limit 1: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.5]
[5-06]
Limit 2: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.6]
[5-07]
Limit 3: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.7]
[5-08]
Limit 4: 0 A~50°A
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=kW:
#
Setting 2 is only meaningful if the
preferential kWh rate power supply is of
type 1 or indoor unit is connected to a
normal kWh rate power supply (via
X2M/5‑6) and the backup heater is NOT
connected to the preferential kWh rate
power supply.
Description
Limit: Only applicable in case of full
time current limitation mode.
[9.9.4]
[9.9.8]
See table below.
Code
[5-05]
0 A~50 A
▪ 3 All: All heaters
[D-05]
[4-09]
▪ 2 Closed: The outdoor unit is
connected to a preferential kWh rate
power supply. When the preferential
kWh rate signal is sent by the
electricity company, the contact will
close and the unit will go in forced off
mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
open and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
▪ 0 No: None
[9.8.3]
Description
Power consumption control:
Code
[5-09]
Description
Limit: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 kW~20 kW
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=kW:
#
Code
Description
[9.9.9]
[5-09]
Limit 1: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.A]
[5-0A]
Limit 2: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.B]
[5-0B]
Limit 3: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.C]
[5-0C]
Limit 4: 0 kW~20°kW
Do NOT use 1 or 3.
[D‑00]
Backup heater
0
Forced OFF
2
Allowed
Compressor
Forced OFF
Power consumption control
Power consumption control
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 10 for detailed information
about this functionality.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
71
8 Configuration
Priority heater
Sensors
#
[9.9.D]
Code
[4-01]
Description
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
▪ 0 None : Backup heater and booster
heater can operate simultaneously.
External sensor
#
[9.B.1]
Code
[C–08]
▪ 1 Booster heater: The booster heater
is prioritized.
External sensor : When an optional
external ambient sensor is connected,
the type of the sensor must be set.
▪ 0 None : NOT installed. The thermistor
in the user interface and in the outdoor
unit are used for measurement.
▪ 2 Backup heater: The backup heater
is prioritized.
▪ 1 Outdoor: Connected to PCB of the
indoor unit measuring the outdoor
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1/2
▪ 0 None : Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
▪ 2 Room: Connected to PCB of the
indoor unit measuring the indoor
temperature. The temperature sensor
in the user interface is NOT used
anymore. Remark: This value has
only meaning in room thermostat
control.
▪ 1 Booster heater: Depending on the
power limitation level, the backup
heater will be limited first, before the
booster heater is limited.
▪ 2 Backup heater: Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
Description
Ext. amb. sensor offset
ONLY applicable in case an external outdoor ambient sensor is
connected and configured.
Note: In case power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models) the setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and
booster heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/
backup heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. This setting
can be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location.
In case power consumption control is ENABLED, the setting [4‑01]
defines the priority of the electrical heaters depending on applicable
limitation.
[9.B.2]
#
Code
[2-0B]
Energy metering
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
Energy metering
If energy metering is performed by the use of external power meters,
configure the settings as described below. Select the pulse
frequency output of each power meter in accordance with the power
meter specifications. It is possible to connect up to 2 power meters
with different pulse frequencies. If only 1 or no power meter is used,
select 'None' to indicate the corresponding pulse input is NOT used.
#
[9.A.1]
Code
[D‑08]
Description
Electricity meter 1:
[D‑09]
Averaging time
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
#
[9.B.3]
Code
[1-0A]
Description
Averaging time:
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 0: No averaging
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 1: 12 hours
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
▪ 2: 24 hours
▪ 3 10/kWh : Installed
▪ 3: 48 hours
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
▪ 4: 72 hours
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed
[9.A.2]
Description
Ext. amb. sensor offset: Offset on the
ambient temperature measured on the
external outdoor temperature sensor.
Electricity meter 2:
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
▪ 3 10/kWh : Installed
Bivalent
Bivalent
Only applies to indoor unit installations with an auxiliary boiler
(alternating operation, connected in parallel). The purpose of
bivalent operation is to determine which heating source can/will
provide the space heating, either the indoor unit or an auxiliary
boiler.
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed
Installer reference guide
72
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
Code
[9.C.1]
Description
[C-02]
Bivalent: Indicates if the space heating is
also performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
#
Code
Description
[9.C.3]
[C-03]
Bivalent ON temperature: Defines the
outdoor temperature below which the
permission signal for the auxiliary boiler
is active (X1 and X2 on EKRP1HB is
closed) and space heating by indoor unit
is stopped.
[9.C.4]
[C-04]
Hysteresis: Defines the temperature
difference between the ON temperature
and the OFF temperature.
▪ 0 No: Not installed
▪ 1 Yes: Installed. The auxiliary boiler
(gas boiler, oil burner) will operate
when the outdoor ambient temperature
is low. During bivalent operation, the
heat pump is turned off. Set this value
in case an auxiliary boiler is used.
▪ If Bivalent is enabled: When the outdoor temperature drops below
the bivalent ON temperature (fixed or variable based on energy
prices), the space heating by the indoor unit stops automatically
and the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is active.
Permission signal X1–X2
a
[C-04]
b
INFORMATION
TA
[C-03]
▪ If Bivalent is disabled: Space heating is only done by the indoor
unit within the operation range. The permission signal for the
auxiliary boiler is always inactive.
TA
[C-03]
a
b
Outdoor temperature
Bivalent ON temperature (fixed)
Auxiliary boiler active
Auxiliary boiler inactive
Possibility 2: Based on the outdoor temperature and energy prices
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the indoor unit.
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on the EKRP1HB (digital I/O PCB). When it is
activated, the contact X1, X2 is closed and open when
it is deactivated. See illustration below for the
schematic location of this contact.
X1 X2 X3 X4
X2M
The installer can set a temperature range [C‑04]. Depending on the
energy prices, a calculated point Tcalc varies within a range between
[C‑03] and [C‑03]+[C‑04]. It is recommended to choose [C‑04] bigger
than the default value to have an optimal operation when choosing
possibility 2.
Electricity and gas prices
#
Code
N/A
Electricity price > High
[7.5.2]
N/A
Electricity price > Medium
[7.5.3]
N/A
Electricity price > Low
[7.6]
N/A
Gas price
INFORMATION
OFF ON
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([9.C.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in menu
structure [7.5.1], [7.5.2] and [7.5.3]. Do NOT use overview
settings.
SS1
When the outdoor temperature reaches below the Tcalc point, then
the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active. To
prevent too much switching, there is a hysteresis of 3°C.
X1M
#
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
Code
Depending on the used boiler, this should be chosen as follows:
[9.C.2]
Code
[7‑05]
[C-03]
Bivalent ON temperature: Below this
temperature bivalent operation will
always be ON.
[9.C.4]
[C-04]
Operation range between which Tcalc is
calculated.
Description
▪ 0: Very high
▪ 1: High
▪ 2: Medium
▪ 3: Low
▪ 4:Very low
Possibility 1: Based on the outdoor temperature
Set all electricity prices ([7.5.1]~[7.5.3]) to "0" in the menu structure.
Also set the following values:
NOTICE
Description
[9.C.3]
Boiler efficiency
#
Description
[7.5.1]
Permission signal X1–X2 (EKRP1HB)
3°C
a
b
[C-03]
Tcalc
[C-03]+[C-04]
TA
Tcalc
a
b
TA
Outdoor temperature
Bivalent ON temperature (variable). Below this
temperature, the auxiliary boiler will always be ON. Tcalc can
never go below [C‑03] or above [C‑03]+[C‑04].
Auxiliary boiler active
Auxiliary boiler inactive
Do NOT use overview settings!
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
73
8 Configuration
CAUTION
#
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
[9.G]
Code
N/A
▪ 0: No
Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
▪ 1 Yes
Forced defrost
Alarm output
Forced defrost
Alarm output
Manually start a defrost operation.
#
Code
[9.D]
[C–09]
Description
Alarm output: Indicates the logic of the
alarm output on the digital I/O PCB
during malfunctioning.
▪ 0 Abnormal: The alarm output will be
powered when an alarm occurs. By
setting this value, a distinction is made
between the detection of an alarm,
and the detection of a power failure.
▪ 1 Normal : The alarm output will NOT
be powered when an alarm occurs.
See also table below (Alarm output
logic).
Alarm output logic
[C-09]
Alarm
No alarm
0
Closed output
Open output
1
Open output
Closed output
No power
supply to unit
Open output
#
[9.H]
Code
N/A
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
▪ OK
Overview field settings
All settings can be done using the menu structure. If for any reason it
is required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the
overview settings can be accessed in the field settings overview [9.I].
See "To modify an overview setting" on page 47.
8.4.10
Operation
In the operation menu, you can separately enable or disable
functionalities of the unit.
#
[C.1]
Code
N/A
Description
Room
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On
[C.2]
Auto restart
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the remote controller settings at the time of the
power failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable the
function.
If the preferential kWh rate power supply is of the type that power
supply is interrupted, always enable the auto restart function.
Continuous indoor unit control can be guaranteed independent of the
preferential kWh rate power supply status, by connecting the indoor
unit to a normal kWh rate power supply.
[9.E]
Description
▪ Back
Auto restart
#
Description
Disable protections
Code
[C-09]
N/A
Space heating/cooling
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On
[C.3]
N/A
Tank
▪ 0: Off
▪ 1: On
Description
Auto restart:
▪ 0: Manual
▪ 1 Automatic
Disable protections
INFORMATION
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([9.G]: Disable protections), that disables automatic
operation by the unit. At first installation, setting Disable
protections is by default set to Yes, meaning automatic
operation is disabled. All protective functions are then
disabled. If the user interface home pages are off, the unit
will NOT operate automatically. To enable automatic
operation and the protective functions, set Disable
protections to No.
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set Disable protections to No, ending "installer-on-site"
mode and enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set Disable protections to Yes manually.
Installer reference guide
74
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
8.5
Menu structure: Overview user settings
[1] Room
Schedule
Heating schedule
Cooling schedule
Antifrost
Setpoint range
Room sensor offset
[1.4] Antifrost
Activation
Room setpoint
[2] Main zone
[1.5] Setpoint range
Schedule
Heating schedule
Cooling schedule
Setpoint mode
Heating WD curve
Cooling WD curve
Heating minimum
Heating maximum
Cooling minimum
Cooling maximum
[3] Additional zone
Schedule
Heating schedule
Cooling schedule
Setpoint mode
Heating WD curve
Cooling WD curve
[7.2] Time/date
Hours
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
Daylight savings time
Format
[4] Space heating/cooling
Operation mode
Operation mode schedule
[7.3] Holiday
[5] Tank
Activation
From
Till
Powerful operation
Comfort setpoint
Eco setpoint
Reheat setpoint
Schedule
[7.4] Quiet
Activation
Schedule
[7] User settings
Language
Time/date
Holiday
Quiet
Electricity price
Gas price
[7.5] Electricity price
High
Medium
Low
Schedule
[8] Information
Energy data
Malfunction history
Dealer information
Sensors
Actuators
Operation modes
About
Connection status
[8.1] Energy data
Electricity input
Produced heat
[B]User profile
[C] Operation
Room
Space heating/cooling
Tank
Setpoint screen
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type,
settings will be visible/invisible.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
75
8 Configuration
8.6
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[9.2] Domestic hot water
[9]Installer settings
Domestic hot water
DHW pump
DHW pump schedule
Solar
Configuration wizard
Domestic hot water
Backup heater
Emergency
Balancing
Water pipe freeze prevention
Benefit kWh power supply
Power consumption control
Energy metering
Sensors
Bivalent
Alarm output
Auto restart
Power saving function
Disable protections
Forced defrost
Overview field settings
[9.3] Backup heater
Backup heater type
Voltage
Configuration
Capacity step 1
Additional capacity step 2
Equilibrium
Equilibrium temperature
Operation
[9.6] Balancing
Space heating priority
Priority temperature
Offset BSH setpoint
Anti-recycle timer
Minimum running timer
Maximum running timer
Additional timer
[9.8] Benefit kWh power supply
Benefit kWh power supply
Allow heater
Allow pump
[9.9] Power consumption control
Power consumption control
Type
Limit
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Priority heater
[9.A] Energy metering
Electricity meter 1
Electricity meter 2
[9.B] Sensors
External sensor
Ext. amb. sensor offset
Averaging time
[9.C] Bivalent
Bivalent
Boiler efficiency
Temperature
Hysteresis
INFORMATION
Solar kit settings are shown but are NOT applicable for this
unit. Settings shall NOT be used or changed.
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type,
settings will be visible/invisible.
Installer reference guide
76
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
9 Commissioning
9
Commissioning
9.1
Overview: Commissioning
Backup heater circuit breaker F1B (field supply) is
turned ON.
There are NO refrigerant leaks.
The refrigerant pipes (gas and liquid) are thermally
insulated.
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
Typical workflow
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2
Performing an air purge.
3
Performing a test run for the system.
4
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
5
There is NO water leak inside the indoor unit.
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
The stop valves (gas and liquid) on the outdoor unit are
fully open.
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
The air purge valve is open (at least 2 turns).
9.2
Precautions when commissioning
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
INFORMATION
The domestic hot water tank is filled completely.
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
INFORMATION
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([9.G]: Disable protections), that disables automatic
operation by the unit. At first installation, setting Disable
protections is by default set to Yes, meaning automatic
operation is disabled. All protective functions are then
disabled. If the user interface home pages are off, the unit
will NOT operate automatically. To enable automatic
operation and the protective functions, set Disable
protections to No.
NOTICE
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
NOTICE
Do NOT operate the unit until the refrigerant piping is
complete (when operated this way, the compressor will
break).
9.3
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set Disable protections to No, ending "installer-on-site"
mode and enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set Disable protections to Yes manually.
Checklist before commissioning
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK:
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
The minimum flow rate during backup heater/defrost
operation is guaranteed in all conditions. See "To check
the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 25.
The indoor unit is properly mounted.
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
To perform an air purge.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to this document and the applicable legislation:
To perform a test run.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
To perform an actuator test run.
▪ Between indoor unit and outdoor unit
▪ Between the local supply panel and the indoor unit
Underfloor screed dryout function
▪ Between the indoor unit and the valves (if applicable)
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
▪ Between the indoor unit and the room thermostat (if
applicable)
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have NOT been
bypassed.
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the indoor and outdoor units.
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate
1 Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration
which space heating loops can be closed due to
mechanical, electronic, or other valves.
—
2 Close all space heating loops that can be closed
(see previous step).
—
3 Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To
perform an actuator test run" on page 78).
—
4 During pump test run operation, go to Sensors.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
77
9 Commissioning
5 Select the flow rate information. During test run
operation, the unit can operate below the minimum
required flow rate.
6 Modify the bypass valve setting to reach the
minimum required flow rate + 2 l/min.
—
6 During manual operation, you can change the
desired pump speed. The position of the 3-way valve
must be changed between space heating and
domestic hot water. To change the settings during
the air purge, open the menu and go to Settings.
▪ Scroll to Circuit and set it to Space/Tank.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
▪ Scroll to Pump speed and set it to Low/High.
12 l/min
9.4.2
7 To stop the air purge manually:
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. Open the air purge valves and
perform an air purge. When the air purge function is running, the
pump operates without actual operation of the unit and the removal
of air in the water circuit will start.
NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
1 Go to Stop air purge.
2 Select OK to confirm.
To perform an automatic air purge
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
3 In the menu, set Type = Automatic.
▪ Manual: the unit operates with a fixed pump speed and in a fixed
or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position of the
3-way valve is a more than helpful feature to remove all air from
the water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. Air purge must be performed for both the space
heating and the domestic hot water circuit. The operation speed of
the pump (slow or quick) can also be set.
4 Select Start air purge.
Typical workflow
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It stops automatically
when done.
6 To stop the air purge manually:
—
1 Go to Stop air purge.
2 Select OK to confirm.
9.4.3
To perform an operation test run
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1
Performing a manual air purge
2
—
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
switches the position of the 3-way valve between the space
heating and the domestic hot water heating mode.
—
Performing an automatic air purge
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
INFORMATION
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
2 Go to [A.1]: Commissioning > Operation test run.
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Heating.
4 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically
when done (±30 min).
To stop the test run manually:
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
—
—
1 Go to Stop test run.
To perform a manual air purge
2 Select OK to confirm.
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.
—
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring its leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperature:
3 In the menu, set Type = Manual.
1 Go to Sensors.
4 Select Start air purge.
2 Select the temperature information.
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It will stop automatically
when air purge cycle is finished.
Installer reference guide
78
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
9 Commissioning
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select Pump, a test run of the
pump will start).
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
—
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
2 Go to [A.2]: Commissioning > Actuator test run.
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Pump.
4 Select OK to confirm.
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
Result: The actuator test run starts. It stops
automatically when done (±30 min).
To stop the test run manually:
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
—
1 Go to Stop test run.
NOTICE
2 Select OK to confirm.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 36 hours after
the first power-on.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Backup heater 1 test
▪ Backup heater 2 test
▪ Pump test
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 36 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
INFORMATION
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
▪ Shut off valve test
NOTICE
▪ Diverter valve test
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
▪ Bivalent signal test
▪ [4‑00]=1
▪ Alarm output test
▪ [C‑02]=0
▪ C/H signal test
▪ [D‑01]=0
▪ DHW pump test
9.4.5
▪ [4‑08]=0
▪ [4‑01]≠1
Underfloor heating screed dryout
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
This function can be executed without finishing the outdoor
installation. In this case, the backup heater will perform the screed
dryout and supply the leaving water without heat pump operation.
When no outdoor unit is installed yet, then connect the main power
supply cable to the indoor unit via X2M/30 and X2M/31. See
"7.9.8 To connect the main power supply" on page 43.
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
Example:
T
24h (1)
36h (2)
25°C (1)
A1
35°C (2)
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit
is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
t
T
t
(1)
(2)
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
Duration (1~72 h)
Action step 1
Action step 2
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
—
2 Go to the programming screen [A.4.2]:
Commissioning > UFH screed dryout > Program.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
79
10 Hand-over to the user
3 Program the schedule:
—
10
Hand-over to the user
To add a new step, select an empty line and change
its value. To delete a step and all steps below it,
decrease the duration to "–".
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
▪ Scroll through the schedule.
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
▪ Adjust the duration (between 1 and 72 hours) and
temperatures (between 15°C and 55°C).
4 Press the left dial to save the schedule.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 47.
—
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
2 Go to [A.4]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout.
3 Set a dryout program: go to Program and use the
UFH screed dryout programming screen.
11
4 Select OK to confirm.
Maintenance and service
NOTICE
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts.
It stops automatically when done.
To stop the test run manually:
Maintenance MUST be done by an authorized installer or
service agent.
—
We recommend performing maintenance at least once a
year. However, applicable legislation might require shorter
maintenance intervals.
1 Go to Stop UFH screed dryout.
2 Select OK to confirm.
NOTICE
To read out the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Prerequisite: You are performing an underfloor heating screed
dryout.
1
Press
2
A graph highlighting the current step of the screed dryout
schedule, the total remaining time, and the current desired
leaving water temperature will be displayed.
.
Press the left dial to access the menu structure and view the status
of sensors and actuators and to adjust the current program.
To stop an underfloor heating screed dryout
11.1
Overview: Maintenance and
service
This chapter contains information about:
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 86.
1 Start in the UFH screed dryout screen.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
—
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The yearly maintenance of the indoor unit
11.2
2 Open the menu and select Stop UFH screed dryout.
Maintenance safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
3 Select OK to confirm.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout is
stopped.
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switchoff, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status:
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
1 Go to [A.4.3]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout >
Status
2 You can read out the value here: Stopped at + the
step where the underfloor screed dryout was
stopped.
—
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
3 Modify and restart the execution of the program.
—
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Outdoor unit heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
Installer reference guide
80
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
11 Maintenance and service
11.4
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the indoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Water pressure
▪ Magnetic filter/dirt separator
▪ Water pressure relief valve
INFORMATION
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the
water filter from the unit to clean it. But in case of trouble
with the water filter, you might have to remove it so that
you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as
follows:
▪ "11.5.1 To remove the water filter" on page 82
▪ Relief valve hose
▪ "11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" on
page 82
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ "11.5.3 To install the water filter" on page 83
▪ Switch box
Water pressure relief valve
▪ Descaling
▪ Chemical disinfection
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
Water pressure
Checkpoints are:
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
Magnetic filter/dirt separator
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush the system
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
a
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
b
c
Pressure relief valve hose
d
a
b
c
d
Screw connection
Magnetic sleeve
Drain valve
Drain cap
The yearly maintenance of the magnetic filter/dirt separator consists
of:
▪ Checking if both parts of the magnetic filter/dirt separator are still
screwed tight (a).
▪ Emptying the dirt separator as follows:
Check whether the pressure relief valve hose is positioned
appropriately to drain the water. See "7.8.5 To connect the drain
hose to the drain" on page 40.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
1
Take off the magnetic sleeve (b).
2
Unscrew the drain cap (d).
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
3
Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter so that the
water and dirt can be collected in a suitable container (bottle,
sink...).
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
4
Open the drain valve for a couple of seconds (c).
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
Result: Water and dirt will come out.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
5
Close the drain valve.
6
Screw the drain cap back on.
7
Reattach the magnetic sleeve.
8
Check the pressure of the water circuit. If required, add water.
Switch box
NOTICE
▪ When checking the magnetic filter/dirt separator for
tightness, hold it firmly, so as NOT to apply stress to
the water piping.
▪ Do NOT isolate the magnetic filter/dirt separator by
closing the shut‑off valves. To properly empty the dirt
separator, sufficient pressure is required.
▪ To prevent dirt from remaining in the dirt separator,
ALWAYS take off the magnetic sleeve.
▪ ALWAYS first unscrew the drain cap, and connect a
drain hose to the bottom of the water filter, then open
the drain valve.
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, K3M and K5M
(depending on your installation) operate correctly. All contacts of
these contactors must be in open position when the power is
turned OFF.
WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
Descaling
Depending on water quality and set temperature, scale can deposit
on the heat exchanger inside the domestic hot water tank and can
restrict heat transfer. For this reason, descaling of the heat
exchanger may be required at certain intervals.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
81
11 Maintenance and service
Chemical disinfection
2
Close the stop valves of the water circuit.
If the applicable legislation requires a chemical disinfection in
specific situations, involving the domestic hot water tank, please be
aware that the domestic hot water tank is a stainless steel cylinder.
We recommend to use a non-chloride based disinfectant approved
for use with water intended for human consumption.
3
Close the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the
expansion vessel.
4
Remove the cap on the bottom of the water filter.
5
Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter.
NOTICE
6
When using means for descaling or chemical disinfection,
it must be ensured that the water quality remains compliant
with EU directive 98/83 EC.
Open the valve on the bottom of the water filter to drain water
from the water circuit. Collect the drained water in a bottle, sink,
… using the installed drain hose.
7
Remove the 2 clips that fix the water filter.
11.4.1
a
b
a
To drain the domestic hot water tank
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
The water in the tank can be very hot.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the unit via the user interface.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the respective circuit breaker.
Prerequisite: Close the cold water supply.
Prerequisite: Open all the hot water tapping points to allow air to
enter the system.
1
Remove the top panel, the user interface panel and the front
panel.
2
Lower the switch box.
3
Remove the stop from the access point to the tank.
4
Use a drain hose and a pump to drain the tank via the access
point.
a
b
Clip
Water filter
8
Remove the water filter.
9
Remove the drain hose from the water filter.
CAUTION
Although the water circuit is drained, some water may be
spilled when removing the water filter from the filter
housing. ALWAYS clean spilled water.
a
11.5.2
a
11.5
Access point to the tank
1
About cleaning the water filter in
case of trouble
▪ "11.5.1 To remove the water filter" on page 82
▪ "11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" on
page 82
Remove the water filter from the unit. See "11.5.1 To remove
the water filter" on page 82.
CAUTION
To protect the piping connected to the water filter from
damage it is recommended to perform this procedure with
the water filter removed from the unit.
INFORMATION
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the
water filter from the unit to clean it. But in case of trouble
with the water filter, you might have to remove it so that
you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as
follows:
To clean the water filter in case of trouble
2
Unscrew the bottom of the water filter housing. Use an
appropriate tool if needed.
CAUTION
Opening the water filter is ONLY required in case of severe
issues. Preferably this action is never to be done during
the complete lifetime of the water filter.
▪ "11.5.3 To install the water filter" on page 83
11.5.1
To remove the water filter
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the unit via the user interface.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the respective circuit breaker.
1
The water filter is located behind the switch box. To get access
to it, see:
▪ "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on page 29
▪ "7.2.5 To lower the switch box on the indoor unit" on
page 30
Installer reference guide
82
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
12 Troubleshooting
a
b
a
b
c
a
a
b
Bottom part to be unscrewed
Water filter housing
3
Remove the strainer and the rolled‑up filter from the water filter
housing and clean with water.
4
Install the cleaned rolled‑up filter and strainer in the water filter
housing.
b
a
Clip
Water filter
Air purge valve
2
Install the 2 clips to fix the water filter to the water circuit pipes.
3
Make sure that the air purge valve of the water filter is in the
open position.
4
Open the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the
expansion vessel.
CAUTION
INFORMATION
Make sure to open the valve (if equipped) towards the
expansion vessel, otherwise the overpressure will be
generated.
Correctly install the strainer in the water filter housing using
the protrusions.
5
c
c
Open the stop valves and add water to the water circuit if
needed.
12
Troubleshooting
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
It contains information about:
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
b
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
c
a
b
c
5
a
Rolled‑up filter
Strainer
Protrusion
Install and properly tighten the bottom of the water filter
housing.
11.5.3
To install the water filter
CAUTION
Check the condition of the O-rings and replace if needed.
Apply water to the O-rings before installation.
1
Install the water filter in the correct location.
12.2
Precautions when troubleshooting
WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, ALWAYS make sure that the unit is
disconnected from the mains. Turn off the respective
circuit breaker.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
83
12 Troubleshooting
12.3.2
WARNING
Prevent hazards due to inadvertent resetting of the thermal
cut-out: this appliance MUST NOT be supplied through an
external switching device, such as a timer, or connected to
a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF by the utility.
12.3.1
Possible causes
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low)
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
12.3
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Solving problems based on
symptoms
Possible causes
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
Corrective action
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
The water flow is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 78) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 78).
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or
cooling as expected
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Corrective action
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
The preferential kWh rate power This should match with the
supply settings and electrical
connections as explained in
connections do NOT match
"6.5 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 28 and "7.9.8 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 43.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
12.3.3
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
Possible causes
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 78) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 78).
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is open.
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump (see the ESP curve in
the "Technical data" chapter).
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The water pressure sensor is
not broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
The water volume in the
installation is too low
Corrective action
There is air in the system
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is open.
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26).
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.4.4 Changing the prepressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 27).
12.3.4
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Possible causes
Installer reference guide
84
Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken
Replace the expansion vessel.
The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is closed.
Open the valve.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26 and
"6.4.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 27).
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
indoor unit and the highest point
of the water circuit. If the indoor
unit is located at the highest
point of the installation, the
installation height is considered
0 m. The maximum water circuit
head is 10 m.
Possible causes
The backup heater equilibrium
temperature has not been
configured correctly
▪ [9.3.7]: Installer settings >
Backup heater > Equilibrium
temperature [5‑01]
There is air in the system.
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [9.6.1]:
Installer settings > Balancing >
Space heating priority [5‑02]
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
12.3.6
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [9.6.3]:
Installer settings > Balancing >
Offset BSH setpoint [5‑03]
Corrective action
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
12.3.7
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes
Check and make sure that:
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
12.3.8
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ [9.3.8]: Installer settings >
Backup heater > Operation
[4‑00]
▪ The backup heater overcurrent
fuse has not been turned off. If
it has, check the fuse and turn
it back on.
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check the
following, and then press the
reset button in the switch box:
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief ▪ Flush and clean the complete
valve.
tank including the piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
Corrective action
The backup heater operation is
not activated
Purge air manually or
automatically. See the air purge
function in the chapter
"9 Commissioning" on page 77.
Too much heat pump capacity is Check and make sure that the
used for heating domestic hot
"space heating priority" settings
water
have been configured
appropriately:
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
Corrective action
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief Contact your local dealer.
valve.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Possible causes
Corrective action
The disinfection function was
Program the start-up of the
interrupted by domestic hot water disinfection function when the
tapping
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
▪ The water pressure
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
▪ The air purge operation
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
85
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
When Tank > Heat up mode >
Reheat only or Schedule +
reheat is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
E5
00
OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor
E6
00
OU: Compressor startup defect
E7
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor unit
fan motor
E8
00
OU: Power input overvoltage
EA
00
OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem
H0
00
OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem
H3
00
OU: Malfunction of high pressure
switch (HPS)
H6
00
OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor
H8
00
OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system
H9
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor air
thermistor
F3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature
F6
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure in
cooling
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
measures before resetting the error code. This should be done by a
licensed installer or by your local dealer.
FA
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure,
actuation of HPS
JA
00
OU: Malfunction of high pressure
sensor
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
J3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
J6
00
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
J6
07
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
L3
00
OU: Electrical box temperature
rise problem
L4
00
OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature rise
L5
00
OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC)
P4
00
OU: Malfunction of radiating fin
temperature sensor
U0
00
OU: Shortage of refrigerant
U2
00
OU: Defect of power supply
voltage
U7
00
OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU
When Tank > Heat up mode >
Schedule only is selected, it is
recommended to program a Eco
action 3 hours before the
scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat
the tank.
The disinfection operation was
Do NOT stop tank operation
stopped manually: [C.3]
during disinfection.
Operation > Tank was turned off
during disinfection.
12.4
12.4.1
Solving problems based on error
codes
To display the help text in case of a
malfunction
In case of a malfunction, the following will appear on the home
screen depending on the severity:
: Error
▪
▪
: Malfunction
You can get a short and a long description of the malfunction as
follows:
1 Press the left dial to open the main menu and go to
Malfunctioning.
Result: A short description of the error and the error
code is displayed on the screen.
2 Press
in the error screen.
Result: A long description of the error is displayed
on the screen.
12.4.2
Error codes: Overview
Error codes of the indoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
01
Water flow problem
Error codes of the outdoor unit
7H
04
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
05
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem
7H
06
A5
00
OU: High pressure peak cut /
freeze protection problem
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost
7H
07
E1
00
OU: PCB defect
Water flow problem. Pump
deblocking active
E3
00
OU: Actuation of high pressure
switch (HPS)
80
00
Returning water temperature
sensor problem
Installer reference guide
86
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
13 Disposal
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
INFORMATION
81
00
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen
89
03
Heat exchanger frozen
8F
00
Abnormal increase outlet water
temperature (DHW)
8H
00
Abnormal increase outlet water
temperature
8H
03
Overheating water circuit
(thermostat)
AA
01
Backup heater overheated
AA
02
External backup heater
overheated
AH
00
Tank disinfection function not
completed correctly
AJ
03
Too long DHW heat-up time
required
C0
00
Water flow detected while pump
is OFF
C0
01
Flow switch malfunction
C0
02
Flow switch malfunction
C4
00
Heat exchanger temperature
sensor problem
CJ
02
Room temperature sensor
problem
EC
00
Abnormal increase tank
temperature
EC
04
Tank preheating
H1
00
External temperature sensor
problem
HC
00
Tank temperature sensor
problem
HC
01
Second tank temperature sensor
problem
HJ
10
Water pressure sensor
abnormality
13.1
JA
17
Refrigerant pressure sensor
abnormality
Typical workflow
U3
00
Under floor heating screed dryout
function not completed correctly
1
2
U4
00
Indoor/outdoor unit
communication problem
U5
00
User interface communication
problem
U8
01
Connection with LAN adapter lost
U8
02
Connection with room thermostat
lost
U8
03
No connection with room
thermostat
UA
00
Indoor unit, outdoor unit matching
problem
UA
17
Tank type problem
UA
21
Extension/hydro mismatch
problem
UA
22
Communication problem between
control box and option box
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
NOTICE
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
INFORMATION
How an error code can be reset will be displayed on the
user interface connected on the indoor unit.
13
Disposal
NOTICE
Do NOT try to dismantle the system yourself: the
dismantling of the system, treatment of the refrigerant, oil
and other parts MUST comply with applicable legislation.
Units MUST be treated at a specialised treatment facility
for reuse, recycling and recovery.
Overview: Disposal
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
Pumping down the system.
Bringing the system to a specialized treatment facility.
INFORMATION
For more details, see the service manual.
13.2
To pump down
Example: To protect the environment, pump down when relocating
the unit or when disposing of the unit.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
87
13 Disposal
L N PWR
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
1
2 3
L
S502
S2
S501
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
N
A
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
1
1×
2
SW4
2
1
SW6
4
3
2
1
3
4
E
D
C
B
A
COOL
SW5
HEAT
5
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
SW2
SW3
SW1
NOTICE
During pump down operation, stop the compressor before
removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still
running and the stop valve is open during pump down, air
will be sucked into the system. Compressor breakdown or
damage to the system can result due to abnormal pressure
in the refrigerant cycle.
Pump down operation will extract all refrigerant from the system into
the outdoor unit.
4
Set DIP switches SW5 and SW6 to OFF.
5
Set DIP switch SW2 to COOL.
6
Reattach the service PCB cover.
7
Turn the power back ON. Proceed with the next step within 3
minutes after restarting.
8
To start forced cooling, press the forced cooling operation
switch SW1.
To stop forced cooling, press the forced cooling operation
switch SW1 again.
1
Remove the valve lid from the liquid stop valve and the gas stop
valve.
9
2
Install a manifold on the gas stop valve.
3
Carry out the forced cooling operation. See "13.3 To start and
stop forced cooling" on page 88.
10 Turn OFF the power, remove the switch box cover and service
PCB cover and set the DIP switches SW5, SW6 and SW2 back
to their original position.
4
After 5 to 10 minutes (after only 1 or 2 minutes in case of very
low ambient temperatures (<−10°C)), close the liquid stop valve
with a hexagonal wrench.
5
Check on the manifold if the vacuum is reached.
6
After 2-3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced
cooling operation.
b
11 Reattach the service PCB cover and switch box cover and turn
the power back ON.
NOTICE
Take care that while running forced cooling operation, the
water temperature remains higher than 5°C (see
temperature read out of the indoor unit). You can achieve
this, for example, by activating all fans of the fan coil units.
c
a
d
e
d
a
b
c
d
e
13.3
Gas stop valve
Closing direction
Hexagonal wrench
Valve lid
Liquid stop valve
To start and stop forced cooling
1
Turn OFF the power.
2
Remove the switch box cover.
2×
3
Remove the service PCB cover.
Installer reference guide
88
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14
Technical data
A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website (publicly accessible). The full set of latest technical data is
available on the Daikin extranet (authentication required).
14.1
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
h
7.0 CuT
R2T
7.0 CuT
7.0 CuT
4.0 CuT
g
4.0 CuT
g
4.0 CuT
g
R1T
12.7 CuT
7.0 CuT
7.0 CuT
6.4 CuT
6.4 CuT
7.0 CuT
f
Y1E
M1F
e
12.7 CuT
6.4 CuT
12.7 CuT
Y1S
R3T
9.5 CuT
S1PH
12.7 CuT
k
6.4 CuT
c
a
6.4 CuT
k
j
9.5 CuT
i
b
15.9 CuT
d
15.9 CuT
M1C
3D110394
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
M1C
M1F
R1T
R2T
R3T
S1PH
Y1E
Y1S
Field piping (liquid: Ø6.4 mm flare connection)
Field piping (gas: Ø15.9 mm flare connection)
Stop valve (liquid)
Stop valve with service port (gas)
Filter
Muffler with filter
Capillary tube
Heat exchanger
Accumulator
Compressor accumulator
Muffler
Compressor
Fan
Thermistor (outdoor air)
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Thermistor (compressor discharge)
High pressure switch (automatic reset)
Electronic expansion valve
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)(ON: cooling)
Heating
Cooling
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
89
14 Technical data
14.2
Piping diagram: Indoor unit
A
B
B1PW
j
C
a2
m
f
n
k
B2PR
d2
R1T
c1
R2T
M3S
R8T
e
b2
R5T
b1
i
R3T
j
C
a1
l
c2
d1
R4T
f
h
f
g
k
k
3D111411
A
B
C
a1
a2
b1
b2
c1
c2
d1
d2
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
Water side
Refrigerant side
Field installed
Space heating water IN
Space heating water OUT
Domestic hot water: cold water IN
Domestic hot water: hot water OUT
Gas refrigerant IN (heating mode; condenser)
Liquid refrigerant OUT (heating mode; condenser)
Liquid refrigerant IN (cooling mode; evaporator)
Gas refrigerant OUT (cooling mode; evaporator)
Plate heat exchanger
Shut-off valve for service (if equipped)
Expansion vessel
Magnetic filter/dirt separator
Safety valve
Air purge
Drain valve
Pump
Flow sensor
Backup heater
Installer reference guide
90
B1PW
B2PR
M3S
R1T
R2T
R3T
R4T
R5T, R8T
Space heating water pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure sensor
3-way valve (space heating/domestic hot water)
Thermistor (heat exchanger – water OUT)
Thermistor (backup heater – water OUT)
Thermistor (liquid refrigerant)
Thermistor (heat exchanger – water IN)
Thermistor (tank)
Screw connection
Flare connection
Quick coupling
Brazed connection
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14.3
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the top plate). The abbreviations used are listed below.
(1) Connection diagram
R3T
Thermistor (discharge)
RTH2
Resistor
S
Connector
S1PH
High pressure switch
S20~502
Connector
SA1
Surge arrestor
Notes
SHM
Terminal strip fixed plate
Connection
SW*
Push button
Main terminal
U, V, W
Connector
Earth wiring
V3, V4, V401
Varistor
Field supply
X*A
Connector
Option
X*M
Terminal strip
Switch box
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve
PCB
Y1S
Solenoid valve (4-way valve)
Wiring depending on model
Z*C
Noise filter (ferrite core)
Protective earth
Z*F
English
Translation
Connection diagram
Connection diagram
(2) Notes
English
Translation
Notes
X1M
Field wire
Noise filter
*
#
Optional
Field supply
NOTES:
1
When operating, do not short-circuit protection device S1PH.
2
Refer to the combination table and the option manual for how
to connect the wiring to X6A, X28A and X77A.
3
Colours: BLK: black; RED: red; BLU: blue; WHT: white; GRN:
green; YLW: yellow
(3) Legend
AL*
Connector
C*
Capacitor
DB*
Rectifier bridge
DC*
Connector
DP*
Connector
E*
Connector
F1U
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V
FU1, FU2
Fuse T 3.15 A 250 V
FU3
Fuse T 30 A 250 V
H*
Connector
IPM*
Intelligent power module
L
Connector
LED 1~5
Indication lamp
LED A
Pilot lamp
L*
Reactor
M1C
Compressor motor
M1F
Fan motor
MR*
Magnetic relay
N
Connector
PCB1
Printed circuit board (main)
PCB2
Printed circuit board (service)
PS
Switching power supply
Q1L
Thermal protector
Q1DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q*
Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT)
R1T
Thermistor (air)
R2T
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
91
14 Technical data
14.4
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the indoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Notes to go through before starting the unit
English
Translation
A8P
* Demand PCB
A9P
Status indicator
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
A10P
MMI (= user interface connected to the
indoor unit) – Power supply unit PCB
X1M
Main terminal
A11P
X2M
Field wiring terminal for AC
MMI (= user interface connected to the
indoor unit) – Main PCB
X5M
Field wiring terminal for DC
X6M
Backup heater power supply
terminal
A12P
* LAN adapter
A14P
* User interface used as room thermostat –
PCB
A15P
* Receiver PCB (wireless On/OFF thermostat)
Earth wiring
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
Not mounted in switch box
Note 1: Connection point of the
power supply for the BUH/BSH
should be foreseen outside the
unit.
Backup heater power supply
MMI display PCB
A13P
B1L
Flow sensor
B1PR
Refrigerant pressure sensor
B1PW
Water pressure sensor
CN* (A4P)
* Connector
Wiring depending on model
DS1(A8P)
* DIP switch
PCB
E1H
Backup heater element (1 kW)
Note 1: Connection point of the
power supply for the backup
heater/booster heater should be
foreseen outside the unit.
E2H
Backup heater element (2 kW)
E3H
Backup heater element (3 kW)
Backup heater power supply
F1B
# Overcurrent fuse backup heater
Thermal fuse backup heater
E*P (A9P)
Indication LED
1N~, 230 V
1N~, 230 V
F1T
3~, 230 V
3~, 230 V
F1U, F2U (A4P)
3N~, 400 V
FU1 (A1P)
Fuse T 5 A 250 V for PCB
FU2 (A10P)
Fuse T 1.6 A 250 V for PCB
K1M, K2M
Contactor backup heater
User interface used as room
thermostat
K5M
Safety contactor backup heater
K*R (A1P-A4P)
Relay on PCB
Ext. indoor thermistor
External indoor thermistor
M1P
Ext outdoor thermistor
External outdoor thermistor
M2P
# Domestic hot water pump
Digital I/O PCB
Digital I/O PCB
M2S
# 2-way valve for cooling mode
Demand PCB
Demand PCB
M3S
3N~, 400 V
User installed options
User installed options
LAN adapter
LAN adapter
Remote user interface
Main LWT
Main leaving water temperature
* Fuse 5 A 250 V for digital I/O PCB
Main supply pump
3-way valve for floorheating/domestic hot
water
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
P1M
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
PC (A15P)
* Power circuit
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
PHC1 (A4P)
* Optocoupler input circuit
Heat pump convector
Q1L
Additional leaving water
temperature
Q4L
# Safety thermostat
Q*DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
* Humidity sensor
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
Heat pump convector
Add LWT
MMI display
Thermal protector backup heater
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
R1H (A2P)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
R1T (A1P )
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
R1T (A2P)
* Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
R1T (A14P)
* Ambient sensor user interface
Position in switch box
English
Translation
Position in switch box
Position in switch box
Legend
A1P
Main PCB
A2P
* On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
A3P
* Heat pump convector
A4P
* Digital I/O PCB
Installer reference guide
92
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
R2T (A1P)
Outlet backup heater thermistor
R2T (A2P)
* External sensor (floor or ambient)
R3T
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
R4T
Inlet water thermistor
R5T, R8T
Domestic hot water thermistor
R6T
* External indoor or outdoor ambient
thermistor
S1S
# Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
S2S
# Electrical meter pulse input 1
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
S3S
# Electrical meter pulse input 2
S6S~S9S
* Digital power limitation inputs
DHW pump output
English
Domestic hot water pump output
Translation
SS1 (A4P)
* Selector switch
DHW pump
Domestic hot water pump
SW1~2 (A12P)
Turn buttons
Electrical meters
Electrical meters
SW3~5 (A12P)
Push buttons
For safety thermostat
For safety thermostat
TR1
Power supply transformer
Inrush
Inrush current
Max. load
Maximum load
X6M
# Backup heater power supply terminal strip
X*, X*A, X*Y, Y*
Connector
Normally closed
Normally closed
X*M
Terminal strip
Normally open
Normally open
Safety thermostat contact: 16 V
DC detection (voltage supplied
by PCB)
Safety thermostat contact:
16 V DC detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
SWB
Switch box
(7) Option PCBs
(7) Option PCBs
Alarm output
Alarm output
Changeover to ext. heat source
Changeover to external heat
source
Max. load
Maximum load
Min. load
Minimum load
Only for demand PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
*
#
Optional
Field supply
Translation of text on wiring diagram
English
Translation
(1) Main power connection
(1) Main power connection
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
Indoor unit supplied from outdoor Indoor unit supplied from outdoor
Normal kWh rate power supply
Normal kWh rate power supply
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Only for demand PCB option
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Options: ext. heat source output, Options: external heat source
alarm output
output, alarm output
SWB
Switch box
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
Space C/H On/OFF output
Space cooling/heating On/OFF
output
(2) Backup heater power supply
(2) Backup heater power supply
SWB
Switch box
Only for ***
Only for ***
(3) User interface
(3) User interface
(8) External On/OFF thermostats (8) External On/OFF thermostats
and heat pump convector
and heat pump convector
Only for LAN adapter
Only for the LAN adapter
Additional LWT zone
Only for remote user interface
EKRUDAS
Only for the user interface used
as room thermostat (EKRUDAS)
Additional leaving water
temperature zone
Main LWT zone
(5) Ext. thermistor
(5) External thermistor
Main leaving water temperature
zone
SWB
Switch box
Only for external sensor (floor/
ambient)
Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
(6) Field supplied options
(6) Field supplied options
Options: On/OFF output
Options: On/OFF output
Power limitation digital inputs: 12 Power limitation digital inputs:
V DC / 12 mA detection (voltage 12 V DC / 12 mA detection
supplied by PCB)
(voltage supplied by PCB)
Only for heat pump convector
Only for heat pump convector
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage 12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
supplied by PCB)
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
230 V AC supplied by PCB
230 V AC supplied by PCB
Continuous
Continuous current
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
93
14 Technical data
Electrical connection diagram
For more details, please check the unit wiring.
Standard part
Power supply
Outdoor unit
1 Only for normal power supply installation
unit power supply: 230 V + earth
3 core
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance to power cables >5 cm
X1M: L-N-earth
1 Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply:
230 V + earth
Normal kWh rate power supply for indoor unit: 230 V
2
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
3 core
2 core
2 core
2x0.75
X1M: 1-2-3
3 core
Field supply
2
Field supply
Indoor unit
Safety thermostat Q4L
Only for *KRP1HB*
X1M: 1-2-3
X2M: 5-6
backup heater power supply (3/6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
5 or 4 or 3
core
(F1B)
X5M: 9-10
X6M: L1-L2-L3 + earth
or L-N + earth
or L1-L2-L3-N + earth
A4P: Y1-YC
X2M: 7-9
Alarm output
2 core
A4P: X1-X2
Changeover to
ext. heat source output
2 core
A4P: Y2-YC
X2M: 7-9
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
2 core
X2M: 1-2
NO valve: X2M: 21-28
NC valve: X2M: 21-29
X5M: 5-6
X5M: 3-4
alarm indication
230 V
Ext. heat source (e.g. boiler)
signal
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
230 V
2 core
Circulation pump for DHW
230 V
2-way valve
2 core
M2S for cooling mode
230 V
2 core
Electricity meter pulse input 1
signal
2 core
Electricity meter pulse input 2
signal
Only for KRCS01-1 or EKRSCA1
X5M: 7-8
2 core
signal
external thermistor (indoor or outdoor)
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
3
main: X2M: 30-34-35
add: X2M: 30-34a-35a
Field supply
Only for *KRP1AHTA
Power limitation
demand input 1
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 4
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
3
main: X2M: 30-31-34-35
add: X2M: 30-31-34a-35a
A8P: X801M: 1-5
A8P: X801M: 2-5
A8P: X801M: 3-5
3
main: X2M: 30-35
add: X2M: 30-35a
3 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
signal
5 core for C/H operation
4 core for H only operation
signal
2 core
signal
Optional part
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
A2P: X1M: C-com-H
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
A15P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
2 core
(3m included)
A2P: X1M: 1-3
signal
Only for *KRTETS
R2T
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
Only for
(heat pump convector)
A3P: X11M: 5-6
A8P: X801M: 4-5
X5M: 11-12
2 core
2x0.75
communication
2 core
2x0.75
communication
Only for EKRUDAS
A14P: P1-P2 user interface
A13P: P1-P2 LAN adapter
4D109881A
Installer reference guide
94
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14.5
INFORMATION
Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant
charge allowed in a room: indoor
unit
Aroom (m2)
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate mc values (i.e. when mc is between
two values from the table), consider the value that
corresponds to the higher mc value from the table. If
mc=1.87 kg, consider the value that corresponds to
"mc=1.88 kg".
Maximum refrigerant charge in a room
(mmax) (kg)
H=600 mm
1
0.138
2
0.276
3
0.414
▪ Systems with total refrigerant charge lower than
1.84 kg are not subjected to any room requirements.
4
0.553
▪ Charges above 1.9 kg are not allowed in the unit.
5
0.691
6
0.829
7
0.907
8
0.970
9
1.028
10
1.084
11
1.137
12
1.187
13
1.236
14
1.283
15
1.328
16
1.371
17
1.413
18
1.454
19
1.494
20
1.533
21
1.571
22
1.608
23
1.644
24
1.679
25
1.714
26
1.748
27
1.781
28
1.814
29
1.846
30
1.877
31
1.909
14.7
mc
Table 3 – Minimum venting
opening area for natural
ventilation: indoor unit
mmax dm=mc–mmax (kg) Minimum venting opening area
(cm2)
H=600 mm
1.9
0.1
1.80
729
1.9
0.3
1.60
648
1.9
0.5
1.40
567
1.9
0.7
1.20
486
1.9
0.9
1.00
418
1.9
1.1
0.80
370
1.9
1.3
0.60
301
1.9
1.5
0.40
216
1.9
1.7
0.20
115
INFORMATION
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate dm values (i.e. when dm is between
two dm values from the table), consider the value that
corresponds to the higher dm value from the table. If
dm=1.55 kg, consider the value that corresponds to
"dm=1.6 kg".
INFORMATION
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate Aroom values (i.e. when Aroom is
between two values from the table), consider the value
that corresponds to the lower Aroom value from the table.
If Aroom=12.5 m2, consider the value that corresponds to
"Aroom=12 m2".
14.6
Table 2 – Minimum floor area:
indoor unit
mc (kg)
Minimum floor area (m²)
H=600 mm
1.84
28.81
1.86
29.44
1.88
30.08
1.90
30.72
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
95
15 Glossary
14.8
ESP curve: Indoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
A (kPa)
70
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
60
50
40
30
Field supply
Equipment NOT made by Daikin that can be combined with
the product according to the instructions in the
accompanying documentation.
C
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
B (l/min)
4D112012
A
B
C
External static pressure in the space heating/cooling circuit
Water flow rate through the unit in the space heating/
cooling circuit
Operation range
Dashed lines: Operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in
case the unit operates with heat pump only. (Not in startup, no
backup heater operation, no defrost operation.)
Notes:
▪ Selecting a flow outside the operating area can damage the unit or
cause the unit to malfunction. See also the minimum and
maximum allowed water flow range in the technical specifications.
▪ Water quality must be according to EU directive 98/83 EC.
15
Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, which explains (if relevant) how to install,
configure, operate and/or maintain the product or
application.
Installer reference guide
96
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH/X04+08S18+23DA
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P495248-1 – 2017.12
1/10
Field settings table
[8.7.5] = .... 7401
Applicable indoor units
*HBX04DA6V
RHBX04DA9W
*HBX08DA6V
*HBX08DA9W
EHBH04DA6V
EHBH08DA6V
EHBH08DA9W
EHVX04S18DA3V*
EHVX04S18DA6V*
EHVX04S23DA3V*
EHVX04S23DA6V*
EHVX08S18DA6V*
EHVX08S18DA9W*
EHVX08S23DA6V*
EHVX08S23DA9W*
EHVH04S18DA6V*
EHVH04S23DA6V*
EHVH08S18DA6V*
EHVH08S18DA9W*
EHVH08S23DA6V*
EHVH08S23DA9W*
Notes
(*1)
(*2)
(*3)
(*4)
(*5)
(*6)
(*7)
*3V
*6V
*9W
*HB*
EHV*
*X*
*H*
Final English - Tanslations in progress
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
2/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
Room
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.5.1
└─ Antifrost
[2-06]
[2-05]
Activation
R/W
Room setpoint
R/W
└─ Setpoint range
Heating minimum
[3-07]
R/W
1.5.2
[3-06]
Heating maximum
R/W
1.5.3
[3-09]
Cooling minimum
R/W
1.5.4
[3-08]
Cooling maximum
R/W
Room
1.6
[2-09]
Room sensor offset
R/W
1.7
[2-0A]
Room sensor offset
R/W
Main zone
2.4
2.5
└─ Heating WD curve
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
[1-00]
R/W
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
2.5
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
2.5
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W
└─ Cooling WD curve
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
2.6
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
2.6
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
2.6
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W
Main zone
2.7
[2-0C]
Emitter type
2.8.1
R/W
Heating maximum
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0C]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]
Cooling minimum
R/W
2.8.4
[9-02]
Cooling maximum
R/W
Main zone
2.9
[C-07]
Control
R/W
2.A
[C-05]
Thermostat type
R/W
└─ Delta T
[1-0B]
2.B.2
[1-0D]
2.C.1
└─ Modulation
[8-05]
2.C.2
[8-06]
Delta T heating
R/W
Delta T cooling
R/W
Modulation
R/W
Max modulation
R/W
└─ Shut off valve
[F-0B]
During thermo
[F-0C]
Additional zone
3.4
3.5
During cooling
R/W
R/W
Setpoint mode
└─ Heating WD curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
[0-00]
R/W
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
3.5
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
3.5
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
└─ Cooling WD curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
[0-04]
R/W
3.6
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
3.6
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
3.6
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
3.5
3.6
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
└─ Setpoint range
[9-01]
Heating minimum
2.8.3
2.D.2
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
[9-00]
2.D.1
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
R/W
2.8.2
2.B.1
12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
15~25°C, step: 0,5°C
15°C
25~35°C, step: 0,5°C
35°C
0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
Setpoint mode
2.5
2.6
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
4~16°C, step: 1°C
12°C
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
3/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Additional zone
3.7
[2-0D]
3.8.1
Setting name
Emitter type
└─ Setpoint range
[9-05]
Heating minimum
Range, step
Default value
R/W
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0D]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3.8.2
[9-06]
Heating maximum
R/W
3.8.3
[9-07]
Cooling minimum
R/W
3.8.4
[9-08]
Cooling maximum
R/W
Thermostat type
R/W
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
Delta T heating
R/W
Delta T cooling
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
Additional zone
3.A
[C-06]
3.B.1
3.B.2
└─ Delta T
[1-0C]
[1-0E]
Space heating / cooling
└─ Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
4.3.1
[4-02]
R/W
Space cooling OFF temp
R/W
Space heating / cooling
4.4
[7-02]
Number of zones
R/W
4.5
[F-0D]
Pump operation mode
4.6
[E-02]
Unit type
4.7
[9-0D]
Pump limitation
4.3.2
[F-01]
Pump outside range
R/W
4.A
[D-03]
Increase around 0°C
R/W
4.B
[9-04]
Overshoot
R/W
4.C
[2-06]
Antifrost
R/W
Tank
5.2
[6-0A]
Comfort setpoint
R/W
5.3
[6-0B]
Eco setpoint
R/W
5.4
[6-0C]
Reheat setpoint
R/W
5.6
[6-0D]
Heat up mode
R/W
└─ Disinfection
Activation
[2-01]
R/W
5.7.2
[2-00]
Operation day
R/W
5.7.3
[2-02]
Start time
R/W
5.7.4
[2-03]
Tank setpoint
R/W
5.7.5
[2-04]
Duration
R/W
Tank
5.8
[6-0E]
Maximum
R/W
5.9
[6-00]
Hysteresis
R/W
5.A
[6-08]
Hysteresis
R/W
Setpoint mode
R/W
5.B
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
14~35°C, step: 1°C
22°C
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
R/W
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
R/W (*6) 0: Reversible (*6)
R/O (*7) 1: Heating only (*7)
R/W
0~8, step:1
0 : No limitation
1~4 : 50~80%
5~8 : 50~80% during sampling
6
Space heating / cooling
4.9
[F-00]
5.7.1
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
0: No
1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
0: No
1: Yes
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
[E-07]≠1 : 55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
[E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
(*4) : 40~75°C, step: 1°C
60°C [E-07]=0
(*4) : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
80°C [E-07]=5
(*5) : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
25°C
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0: Fixed
1: Weather dependent
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
4/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
5.C
└─ WD curve
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
5.C
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
5.C
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
5.C
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
Tank
5.D
[6-01]
Margin
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
Activation
R/W
0: OFF
1: Quiet
2: More quiet
3: Most quiet
4: Automatic
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
User settings
└─ Quiet
7.4.1
7.5.1
└─ Electricity price
High
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
7.5.2
Medium
R/W
7.5.3
Low
R/W
User settings
7.6
Gas price
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
1,0/kWh
Installer settings
└─ Configuration wizard
└─ System
9.1
[E-03]
BUH type
R/O
9.1
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
Domestic hot water
R/W
9.1
[4-06]
Emergency
R/W
9.1
[7-02]
Number of zones
R/W
2: 3V (*1)
3: 6V (*2)
4: 9W (*3)
0: No DHW (*4)
2: EKHW (*4)
3: Integrated (*5)
7: EKHWP (*4)
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: Single zone
1: Dual zone
9.1
[5-0D]
9.1
[4-0A]
Configuration
9.1
[6-03]
Capacity step 1
9.1
[6-04]
Additional capacity step 2
9.1
[2-0C]
└─ Main zone
Emitter type
R/W
9.1
[C-07]
Control
R/W
Setpoint mode
R/W
9.1
9.1
└─ Backup heater
Voltage
R/W (*2)
R/O (*1)
(*3)
R/W
0: 230V, 1~ (*1) (*2)
1: 230V, 3~ (*2)
2: 400V, 3~ (*3)
0: 1 (*1)
1: 1/1+2 (*2) (*3)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*2)
3kW (*1)(*3)
R/O (*1) 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
R/W (*2) 0kW (*1)
(*3)
4kW (*2)
6kW (*3)
Schedule
R/W
9.1
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W
9.1
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W
9.1
[2-0D]
9.1
└─ Additional zone
Emitter type
R/W
Setpoint mode
R/W
Schedule
R/W
9.1
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
0: No
1: Yes
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: Fixed
1: WD heating, fixed cooling
2: Weather dependent
0: No
1: Yes
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
5/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.1
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-04]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
└─ Tank
Heat up mode
Range, step
Default value
9.1
[6-0D]
9.1
[6-0A]
Comfort setpoint
R/W
9.1
[6-0B]
Eco setpoint
R/W
[6-0C]
Reheat setpoint
R/W
9.1
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.4
9.3.1
└─ Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
R/W
[D-02]
DHW pump
R/W
[D-07]
Solar
R/W
└─ Back up heater
[E-03]
BUH type
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: No DHW (*4)
2: EKHW (*4)
3: Integrated (*5)
7: EKHWP (*4)
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
0: No
1: Yes
R/O
9.3.2
[5-0D]
Voltage
9.3.3
[4-0A]
Configuration
9.3.4
[6-03]
Capacity step 1
9.3.5
[6-04]
Additional capacity step 2
9.3.6
[5-00]
Equilibrium
9.3.7
[5-01]
Equilibrium temperature
9.3.8
[4-00]
Operation
9.4.1
R/W
└─ Booster heater
[6-02]
Capacity
2: 3V (*1)
3: 6V (*2)
4: 9W (*3)
R/W (*2) 0: 230V, 1~ (*1) (*2)
R/O (*1) 1: 230V, 3~ (*2)
(*3)
2: 400V, 3~ (*3)
R/W
0: 1 (*1)
1: 1/1+2 (*2) (*3)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*2)
3kW (*1)(*3)
R/O (*1) 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
R/W (*2) 0kW (*1)
(*3)
4kW (*2)
6kW (*3)
R/W
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*4)
0kW (*5)
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
9.4.3
[8-03]
BSH eco timer
R/W
9.4.4
[4-03]
Operation
R/W
Emergency
R/W
0: Manual
1: Automatic
Space heating priority
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
Installer settings
9.5
[4-06]
9.6.1
└─ Balancing
[5-02]
9.6.2
[5-03]
Priority temperature
R/W
9.6.3
[5-04]
Offset BSH setpoint
R/W
9.6.4
[8-02]
Anti-recycle timer
R/W
9.6.5
[8-00]
Minimum running timer
R/W
9.6.6
[8-01]
Maximum running timer
R/W
9.6.7
[8-04]
Additional timer
R/W
Installer settings
9.7
[4-04]
9.8.1
Water pipe freeze prevention
└─ Benefit kWh power supply
[D-01]
Benefit kWh power supply
0: Intermittent
1: Continuous
2: Off
R/W
9.8.2
[D-00]
Allow heater
R/W
9.8.3
[D-05]
Allow pump
R/W
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: Forced off
1: As normal
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
6/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
9.9.1
Field code
Setting name
└─ Power consumption control
[4-08]
Power consumption control
Range, step
Default value
R/W
9.9.2
[4-09]
Type
9.9.3
[5-05]
Limit
R/W
9.9.4
[5-05]
Limit 1
R/W
9.9.5
[5-06]
Limit 2
R/W
9.9.6
[5-07]
Limit 3
R/W
9.9.7
[5-08]
Limit 4
R/W
9.9.8
[5-09]
Limit
R/W
9.9.9
[5-09]
Limit 1
R/W
9.9.A
[5-0A]
Limit 2
R/W
9.9.B
[5-0B]
Limit 3
R/W
9.9.C
[5-0C]
Limit 4
R/W
9.9.D
[4-01]
Priority heater
9.A.1
9.A.2
9.B.1
R/W
└─ Energy metering
[D-08]
Electricity meter 1
[D-09]
└─ Sensors
[C-08]
R/W
Electricity meter 2
R/W
External sensor
R/W
9.B.2
[2-0B]
Ext. amb. sensor offset
R/W
9.B.3
[1-0A]
Averaging time
R/W
9.C.1
└─ Bivalent
[C-02]
Bivalent
R/W
9.C.2
[7-05]
Boiler efficiency
R/W
9.C.3
[C-03]
Temperature
R/W
9.C.4
[C-04]
Hysteresis
R/W
Installer settings
9.D
[C-09]
Alarm output
R/W
9.E
[3-00]
Auto restart
R/W
9.F
9.G
[E-08]
Power saving function
Disable protections
R/O
R/W
9.I
└─ Overview field settings
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-04]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
0: No
1: Bivalent
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
-25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: No
1: Yes
1: Enabled
0: No
1: Yes
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
7/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.I
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
9.I
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve. R/W
9.I
[1-04]
Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone.
R/W
9.I
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone
R/W
9.I
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve. R/W
9.I
[1-0A]
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
R/W
9.I
[1-0B]
What is the desired delta T in heating for the main zone?
R/W
9.I
[1-0C]
What is the desired delta T in heating for the additional zone?
R/W
9.I
[1-0D]
What is the desired delta T in cooling for the main zone?
R/W
9.I
[1-0E]
What is the desired delta T in cooling for the additional zone?
R/W
9.I
[2-00]
When should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
9.I
[2-01]
Should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
9.I
[2-02]
When should the disinfection function start?
R/W
9.I
[2-03]
What is the disinfection target temperature?
R/W
9.I
[2-04]
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
R/W
9.I
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-06]
Room frost protection
R/W
9.I
[2-09]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-0A]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-0B]
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
R/W
9.I
[2-0C]
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
R/W
9.I
[2-0D]
What emitter type is connected to the additional LWT zone?
R/W
9.I
[3-00]
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[3-01]
[3-02]
[3-03]
[3-04]
[3-05]
[3-06]
-----What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
9.I
[3-07]
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
9.I
[3-08]
What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[3-09]
What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[4-00]
What is the BUH operation mode?
R/W
9.I
[4-01]
Which electric heater has priority?
R/W
9.I
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
9.I
[4-03]
Operation permission of the booster heater.
R/W
9.I
[4-04]
Water pipe freeze prevention
9.I
9.I
[4-05]
[4-06]
-Emergency
R/W
9.I
[4-08]
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
R/W
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
Range, step
Default value
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0: No
1: Yes
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
[E-07]≠1 : 55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
[E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
4~16°C, step: 1°C
12°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
4
2
1
18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
25~35°C, step: 0,5°C
35°C
15~25°C, step: 0,5°C
15°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
0: Intermittent
1: Continuous
2: Off
0
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
8/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.I
[4-09]
Which power limitation type is required?
9.I
[4-0A]
Backup heater configuration
9.I
[4-0B]
Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis.
9.I
[4-0D]
Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset.
9.I
[5-00]
9.I
[5-01]
Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
9.I
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
9.I
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
9.I
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
9.I
[5-05]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
9.I
[5-06]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
9.I
[5-07]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
9.I
[5-08]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
9.I
[5-09]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
9.I
[5-0A]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
9.I
[5-0B]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
9.I
[5-0C]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
9.I
[5-0D]
Backup heater voltage
9.I
9.I
[5-0E]
[6-00]
-The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
9.I
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
9.I
[6-02]
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
9.I
[6-03]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
9.I
[6-04]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
9.I
9.I
9.I
[6-05]
[6-06]
[6-07]
--What is the capacity of the bottom plate heater?
9.I
[6-08]
What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
9.I
9.I
[6-09]
[6-0A]
-What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
9.I
[6-0B]
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
9.I
[6-0C]
What is the desired reheat temperature?
9.I
[6-0D]
What is the desired DHW production type?
9.I
[6-0E]
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
9.I
[7-00]
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
9.I
[7-01]
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
9.I
[7-02]
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
9.I
9.I
9.I
[7-03]
[7-04]
[7-05]
--Boiler efficiency
9.I
[8-00]
Minimum running time for domestic hot water operation.
9.I
[8-01]
Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
9.I
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
9.I
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
9.I
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
9.I
[8-05]
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
9.I
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
R/W
0: Current
1: Power
0: 1 (*1)
1: 1/1+2 (*2) (*3)
2: 1/2
3: 1/2 + 1/1+2 in emergency
R/W
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
R/W
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C
R/W
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
R/W
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
R/W
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
R/W
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
R/W
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
R/W (*2) 0: 230V, 1~ (*1) (*2)
R/O (*1) 1: 230V, 3~ (*2)
(*3)
2: 400V, 3~ (*3)
1
R/W
2~40°C, step: 1°C
25°C
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
R/W
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2kW (*2)
3kW (*1)(*3)
R/O (*1) 0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
R/W (*2) 0kW (*1)
(*3)
4kW (*2)
6kW (*3)
0
0
R/W
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
R/W
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0
R/W
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
R/W
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
R/W
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
R/W
(*4) : 40~75°C, step: 1°C
60°C [E-07]=0
(*4) : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
80°C [E-07]=5
(*5) : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
R/W
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
R/W
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
R/W
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
2.5
0
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
R/W
0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
R/W
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
R/W
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
R/W
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
R/W
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
R/W
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
9/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
9.I
[8-07]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[8-08]
What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[8-09]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
R/W
9.I
[8-0A]
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[8-0B]
[8-0C]
[8-0D]
[9-00]
---What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-01]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-02]
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[9-03]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[9-04]
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
R/W
9.I
[9-05]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-06]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-07]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[9-08]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
9.I
[9-0C]
Room temperature hysteresis.
R/W
9.I
[9-0D]
Pump speed limitation
R/W
9.I
9.I
[9-0E]
[C-00]
-Domestic heating water priority.
R/W
9.I
9.I
[C-01]
[C-02]
-Is an external backup heat source connected?
R/W
9.I
[C-03]
Bivalent activation temperature.
R/W
9.I
[C-04]
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
R/W
9.I
[C-05]
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
R/W
9.I
[C-06]
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
R/W
9.I
[C-07]
What is the unit control method in space operation?
R/W
9.I
[C-08]
Which type of external sensor is installed?
R/W
9.I
[C-09]
What is the required alarm output contact type?
R/W
9.I
9.I
[C-0A]
[D-00]
-Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
9.I
[D-01]
Contact type of preferential kWh rate PS installation?
R/W
9.I
[D-02]
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
R/W
9.I
[D-03]
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
R/W
9.I
[D-04]
Is a demand PCB connected?
R/W
9.I
[D-05]
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
9.I
[D-07]
Is a solar kit connected?
R/W
9.I
[D-08]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
9.I
[D-09]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
13
10
16
[2-0C]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0D]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
0~8, step:1
0 : No limitation
1~4 : 50~80%
5~8 : 50~80% during sampling
6
6
0: Solar priority
1: Heat pump priority
0
0: No
1: Bivalent
-25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
0: No
1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
10/10
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.I
9.I
9.I
[D-0A]
[D-0B]
[E-00]
--Which type of unit is installed?
9.I
9.I
[E-01]
[E-02]
Which type of compressor is installed?
What is the indoor unit software type?
9.I
[E-03]
What is the number of backup heater steps?
9.I
[E-04]
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
9.I
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
9.I
[E-06]
Is a DHW tank installed in the system?
9.I
[E-07]
What kind of DHW tank is installed?
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[E-08]
[E-09]
[E-0A]
[E-0B]
[E-0C]
[E-0D]
[E-0E]
[F-00]
Power saving function for outdoor unit.
--Is a bi-zone kit installed?
-Is glycol present in the system?
-Pump operation allowed outside range.
9.I
[F-01]
Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed?
9.I
[F-02]
Bottom plate heater ON temperature.
9.I
[F-03]
Bottom plate heater hysteresis.
9.I
[F-04]
Is a bottom plate heater connected?
9.I
9.I
[F-05]
[F-09]
-Pump operation during flow abnormality.
9.I
9.I
[F-0A]
[F-0B]
-Close shut-off valve during thermo OFF?
9.I
[F-0C]
Close shut-off valve during cooling?
9.I
[F-0D]
What is the pump operation mode?
4P495257-1A - 2017.11
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0
2
0~5
0: LT split
R/O
0
R/W (*6) 0: Reversible (*6)
R/O (*7) 1: Heating only (*7)
R/O
2: 3V (*1)
3: 6V (*2)
4: 9W (*3)
R/O
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
0: No (*4)
1: Yes (*5)
R/O
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
0~6
0: EKHW (*4)
1: Integrated (*5)
5: EKHWP (*4)
R/O
1: Enabled
1
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
R/W
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
R/W
2~5°C, step: 1°C
5°C
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
0
R/W
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
R/O
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
(*1) *3V_(*2) *6V_
(*3) *9W_(*4) *HB*_
(*5) EHV*_
(*6) *X*_(*7) *H*
Final English - Tanslations in progress
Copyright 2017 Daikin
4P495248-1 2017.12
Final English - Tanslations in progress
Download PDF
Similar pages